home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search
/ Bible Heaven / Bible Heaven.iso / business / treas171 / manual < prev    next >
Text File  |  1992-12-30  |  381KB  |  8,639 lines

  1.  
  2.  
  3.  
  4.  
  5.  
  6.  
  7.  
  8.  
  9.                                          The
  10.  
  11.                                      VIANSOFT(R)
  12.  
  13.                                   CHURCH TREASURER
  14.  
  15.  
  16.  
  17.                                        IBM PC
  18.  
  19.                                          or
  20.  
  21.                                      Compatible
  22.  
  23.  
  24.                                PC DOS 2.0 (or higher)
  25.  
  26.                                MS DOS 2.1 (or higher)
  27.  
  28.                                     ~~~~~~~~~~~~
  29.  
  30.                                     User's Manual
  31.  
  32.                       Copyright 1988 - 1993 by Vian Corporation
  33.                    452 West Hill Rd., Glen Gardner, NJ 08826-9726
  34.                                  ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
  35.  
  36.  
  37.  
  38.                           *  *  *  W A R N I N G   *  *  *
  39.  
  40.          This software and manual are both protected by U. S. Copyright Law
  41.          (Title 17 United States Code). Unauthorized reproduction and/or
  42.          sales may result in imprisonment of up to one year and fines of up
  43.          to ten thousand dollars (17 USC 506). Copyright infringers may be
  44.          subject to civil liability.
  45.  
  46.          No part of this program or documentation may be reproduced in any
  47.          form whatsoever without the written permission of Vian Corporation,
  48.          452 West Hill Rd., Glen Gardner, New Jersey 08826-9726.
  49.  
  50.  
  51.  
  52.          VIANSOFT is a registered trademark of Vian Corporation.
  53.  
  54.          IBM PC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
  55.          Corporation.
  56.  
  57.                                                            Table of Contents
  58.  
  59.  
  60.  
  61.          TABLE OF CONTENTS
  62.  
  63.  
  64.          Introduction......................................................v
  65.             How to Use This Manual........................................vi
  66.             System Requirements..........................................vii
  67.             System Capacities...........................................viii
  68.             System Features.............................................viii
  69.  
  70.          Getting Started - How to Begin..................................1-1
  71.             Organizing Your Church Information...........................1-1
  72.             Set Up Bank Accounts.........................................1-4
  73.             Set Up Funds.................................................1-5
  74.             Set Up Budget Items/Categories...............................1-6
  75.             Set Up Report Groupings......................................1-6
  76.  
  77.             Assigning Number Codes.......................................1-7
  78.             Installing the VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer on Your Computer.1-9
  79.             Starting the VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer...................1-10
  80.             Enter Church Information....................................1-11
  81.             Enter Fund Information......................................1-11
  82.  
  83.             Enter Report Grouping Information...........................1-12
  84.             Enter Budget Item/Category Information......................1-12
  85.             Enter Bank Account Information..............................1-13
  86.             Set Bank Account and Fund Code Default......................1-13
  87.             Recording and Posting Income and Expenses to Date...........1-14
  88.  
  89.             Quit........................................................1-17
  90.             Completing the Set Up of the System.........................1-18
  91.  
  92.          General Information.............................................2-1
  93.             Selecting a Main Menu Option.................................2-1
  94.             Summary of Main Menu Options.................................2-1
  95.             Normal Recording and Posting Routine.........................2-2
  96.             Year End Routine.............................................2-3
  97.             Recording and Posting Church Activities to a Fund............2-7
  98.  
  99.             Recording and Posting Income and Expenses for Organizations
  100.              Within Your Church..........................................2-7
  101.             Start Up System..............................................2-8
  102.             Close Down System............................................2-9
  103.             Backup.......................................................2-9
  104.             Format (Formatting a floppy disk)...........................2-14
  105.  
  106.             Basic Edit Commands.........................................2-16
  107.             Using a Key Disk With a Hard Disk System....................2-17
  108.             Non-Monetary Assets.........................................2-19
  109.             Troubleshooting.............................................2-20
  110.  
  111.  
  112.  
  113.                                                                           ii
  114.  
  115.                                                            Table of Contents
  116.  
  117.  
  118.  
  119.          Bank Account (Now ________).....................................3-1
  120.  
  121.          Enter Transactions Menu.........................................4-1
  122.             Enter Income.................................................4-1
  123.             Enter Income Adjustment......................................4-7
  124.             Enter Expenses..............................................4-11
  125.             Enter Expense Adjustment....................................4-14
  126.             Enter Transfer (Bank Account to Bank Account)...............4-17
  127.  
  128.             Enter Special Transaction...................................4-20
  129.             Enter Balance Forward.......................................4-23
  130.             Transactions by Entry Date (Journal)........................4-26
  131.             Quit........................................................4-29
  132.  
  133.          Reports Menu....................................................5-1
  134.             Running a Report.............................................5-1
  135.             Transactions by Item Report..................................5-4
  136.             Transactions by Entry Type Report............................5-5
  137.             Transactions by Entry Date Report (Journal)..................5-6
  138.             Expenses by Posting Date Report..............................5-7
  139.             Expenses by Item Report......................................5-8
  140.  
  141.             Income by Posting Date Report................................5-9
  142.             Transfers by Posting Date Report............................5-10
  143.             Adjustments by Posting Date Report..........................5-11
  144.             Specials by Posting Date Report.............................5-12
  145.             Budget vs Expenses Report...................................5-13
  146.  
  147.             Income vs Expenses Report...................................5-14
  148.             Location of Funds Report....................................5-15
  149.             Single Bank Account Status Report...........................5-16
  150.             All Bank Accounts Summary Report............................5-17
  151.             Item Code List..............................................5-17
  152.  
  153.             Bank Accounts Code List.....................................5-18
  154.             Quit........................................................5-18
  155.  
  156.          Display/Edit Menu...............................................6-1
  157.             Budget Item/Category Display/Edit............................6-1
  158.             Report Grouping Display/Edit.................................6-5
  159.             Fund Display/Edit............................................6-8
  160.             Bank Account Display/Edit...................................6-11
  161.             Church Information Display/Edit.............................6-14
  162.             Quit........................................................6-17
  163.  
  164.          Prove Bank Statement............................................7-1
  165.             Routine Bank Statement Reconciliation........................7-1
  166.  
  167.  
  168.  
  169.  
  170.  
  171.                                                                          iii
  172.  
  173.                                                            Table of Contents
  174.  
  175.  
  176.  
  177.          Utilities Menu..................................................8-1
  178.             New Disk (Floppy Data Disk Only).............................8-1
  179.             Year End.....................................................8-4
  180.             Repair Menu..................................................8-5
  181.             Disk Status..................................................8-6
  182.             Install (Toggles)............................................8-7
  183.             Translate Menu...............................................8-8
  184.             Quit........................................................8-10
  185.  
  186.          Subdirectory (Now ________).....................................9-1
  187.             Hard Disk Only...............................................9-1
  188.  
  189.          Set Posting Information Disk Name (Now ________)...............10-1
  190.             Floppy Disk Only:...........................................10-1
  191.  
  192.          Change Posting Information Disk (Now ________).................11-1
  193.             Floppy Disk Only:...........................................11-1
  194.  
  195.          Appendix.......................................................12-1
  196.             Edit Information............................................12-1
  197.             Update Program..............................................12-2
  198.             Dual Floppy Disk Set Up Procedure...........................12-3
  199.             Single Floppy Disk Set Up Procedure.........................12-6
  200.             Transaction Type Codes......................................12-8
  201.  
  202.             Diskcopy....................................................12-9
  203.             Alternate Method of Recording and Posting Payroll..........12-11
  204.  
  205.          Index...........................................................I-1
  206.  
  207.  
  208.  
  209.  
  210.  
  211.  
  212.  
  213.  
  214.  
  215.  
  216.  
  217.  
  218.  
  219.  
  220.  
  221.  
  222.  
  223.  
  224.  
  225.  
  226.  
  227.  
  228.  
  229.                                                                           iv
  230.  
  231.                                                                 Introduction
  232.  
  233.  
  234.  
  235.          INTRODUCTION
  236.  
  237.  
  238.          The VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer will save you time, place valuable
  239.          information at your finger tips and allow you to record and post
  240.          church income and expenses and generated reports more efficiently.
  241.  
  242.                                << I M P O R T A N T >>
  243.  
  244.          To insure satisfactory results with the VIANSOFT(R) Church
  245.          Treasurer, continue to use your present system in parallel with
  246.          VIANSOFT(R) until you have seen that all features are working as
  247.          you expect them to.
  248.  
  249.          NEVER touch actual disk surface (in unprotected area).
  250.  
  251.          NEVER write on disks with anything but a felt tip marker.
  252.  
  253.          NEVER touch disk drives while they are operating. (Red light
  254.          usually indicates that the drive is operating.)
  255.  
  256.          NEVER change disks unless told to do so.
  257.  
  258.          NEVER use tractor and friction feed simultaneously on the printer.
  259.  
  260.          NEVER remove disks from disk drives unless told to do so.
  261.  
  262.          ALWAYS put the disk in its protective jacket when not in the disk
  263.          drive.
  264.  
  265.          ALWAYS store disks as far away from magnetic fields as possible
  266.          (including disk drives and monitors).
  267.  
  268.          ALWAYS make backup copies of any data disks you used at the end of
  269.          each session. Have at least two backup disks for each data disk and
  270.          alternate them.
  271.  
  272.          ALWAYS exit program by typing q (for Quit) from the MAIN MENU.
  273.  
  274.          ALWAYS clean disk drives in accordance with recommendation from the
  275.          manufacturer.
  276.  
  277.          ALWAYS look at bottom of screen for a message when you hear a beep.
  278.  
  279.          Answer any single letter response in upper or lower case.
  280.  
  281.          Escape <Esc> key can be pressed instead of the letter q (for Quit)
  282.          or Ctrl-q.
  283.  
  284.  
  285.  
  286.  
  287.                                                                            v
  288.  
  289.                                                       How To Use This Manual
  290.  
  291.  
  292.  
  293.          HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
  294.  
  295.          The VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer End User's Manual is divided into
  296.          two main sections, the Set Up Procedure (which includes General
  297.          Information) and the Reference Section (with Appendices and Index).
  298.  
  299.          Tutorial
  300.  
  301.          If you have not worked through the Tutorial included on the
  302.          Tutorial-Trial Disk, you should do so now.
  303.  
  304.          At the A>, place the copy of the Tutorial-Trial Disk in Drive A.
  305.          Type Readme and press <Enter>.
  306.  
  307.          Print a copy of the tutorial using the Install program on the
  308.          Tutorial-trial disk. The Tutorial will give you a chance to work
  309.          with the software prior to setting it up for your church. Once you
  310.          have become familiar with the general working of the software, it
  311.          will be easier to set up the system for your church. The Tutorial
  312.          is also used to train other church members to use the VIANSOFT(R)
  313.          Church Treasurer when they are elected or appointed Treasurer of
  314.          the church.
  315.  
  316.          Set Up Procedure
  317.  
  318.          The User's Manual will help you decide how to set up your Bank
  319.          Accounts, Funds, Report Groupings and Budget Items/Categories for
  320.          your church. After that, you will follow step-by-step instructions
  321.          to set up the VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer on your computer. Take
  322.          your time through the set up.
  323.  
  324.          After the VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer is set up on your computer,
  325.          you should read through the General Information section.
  326.  
  327.          Reference Section
  328.  
  329.          The Reference Section of this manual is organized by Main Menu
  330.          option. (A menu displays a list of choices; you choose one.)
  331.  
  332.          Procedures for using each option are discussed in detail. The
  333.          Reports section includes how to access each report and what
  334.          information is included on each report.
  335.  
  336.          The Index in the back of the manual will help you locate specific
  337.          areas of the manual needed for reference.
  338.  
  339.  
  340.  
  341.  
  342.  
  343.  
  344.  
  345.                                                                           vi
  346.  
  347.                                                          System Requirements
  348.  
  349.  
  350.  
  351.          SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
  352.  
  353.             Hardware:         IBM PC Computer or compatible.
  354.  
  355.                                   With 384K Memory (minimum) and Hard Disk
  356.                                   and one floppy disk drive (360K minimum).
  357.  
  358.                                   -OR-
  359.  
  360.                                   Two disk drives (360K minimum each -
  361.                                   double-sided).
  362.  
  363.                                   -OR-
  364.  
  365.                                   One disk drive (720K minimum)
  366.  
  367.                               80 column monitor.
  368.  
  369.                               Compatible printer.
  370.  
  371.             Operating System: PC DOS 2.0 (or higher)
  372.  
  373.                               -OR-
  374.  
  375.                               MS DOS 2.1 (or higher (for compatible))
  376.  
  377.             Disks:            High quality (10 disks to start for floppy
  378.                               system)
  379.  
  380.                               5 1/4" floppy double-sided, double-density
  381.                               soft-sectored disks. (10 disks to start)
  382.  
  383.                               3 1/2" disks 720K or High Density (HD) based
  384.                               on your disk drive (more information can be
  385.                               stored on the HD disks).
  386.  
  387.             Paper:
  388.  
  389.                               9 1/2" x 11" fanfold (for tractor feed
  390.                               printer)
  391.  
  392.                               Address Labels:
  393.  
  394.                               Use pressure sensitive labels. 3 1/2" x 15/16"
  395.                               single column.
  396.  
  397.  
  398.  
  399.  
  400.  
  401.  
  402.  
  403.                                                                          vii
  404.  
  405.                                               System Capacities and Features
  406.  
  407.  
  408.  
  409.          SYSTEM CAPACITIES
  410.  
  411.                               Maximum of 15 separate Bank Accounts (e.g.,
  412.                               Checking, Savings, Money Market, Mutual Funds,
  413.                               etc.).
  414.  
  415.                               Maximum of 500 Item Codes (Funds, Report
  416.                               Groupings or Budget Items/Categories).
  417.  
  418.                               Number of transactions (line items) based on
  419.                               available disk space.
  420.  
  421.             Floppy Disks      When the first floppy data disk is full, the
  422.                               recording and posting continues on the second
  423.                               floppy disk, and so on.
  424.  
  425.          SYSTEM FEATURES
  426.  
  427.                                 . Easy recording and posting of church
  428.                                   income and expenses
  429.  
  430.                                 . Tracking of expenses for Budget Items
  431.  
  432.                                 . Posting to previous dates (with audit
  433.                                   trail)
  434.  
  435.                                 . Translate information to ASCII format for
  436.                                   spread sheet use
  437.  
  438.                                 . Reports:
  439.  
  440.                                   Transactions By Entry Date (Journal)
  441.                                   Transactions By Item (Budget Item, etc.)
  442.                                   Transactions By Entry Type (Income,
  443.                                   Expenses, etc.)
  444.                                   Expenses By Posting Date
  445.                                   Expenses By Item
  446.                                   Income By Posting Date
  447.                                   Transfers By Posting Date
  448.                                   Adjustments By Posting Date
  449.                                   Specials By Posting Date
  450.                                   Budget vs Expenses (Date Range or Year-To-
  451.                                   Date)
  452.                                   Income vs Expenses (Date Range or Year-To-
  453.                                   Date)
  454.                                   Location Of Funds
  455.                                   Single Bank Account Status
  456.                                   All Bank Account Summary
  457.                                   Bank Account Code List
  458.                                   Item Code List (Budget Item/Category,
  459.                                   Report Group and Fund)
  460.  
  461.                                                                         viii
  462.  
  463.  
  464.  
  465.  
  466.          GETTING STARTED - HOW TO BEGIN
  467.  
  468.  
  469.                               Before you set up the VIANSOFT(R) Church
  470.                               Treasurer on your computer, you will need to
  471.                               take a few minutes to decide how you will
  472.                               organize the church Bank Accounts into Funds,
  473.                               Report Groupings and Budget Item/Categories.
  474.  
  475.          ORGANIZING YOUR CHURCH INFORMATION
  476.  
  477.                               First, it is important to understand what is
  478.                               meant by the terms Bank Account, Fund, Report
  479.                               Grouping and Budget Item/Category as they are
  480.                               used in the VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer.
  481.  
  482.                               Read all of pages 11 through 18 regarding Bank
  483.                               Accounts, Funds, Report Groupings and Budget
  484.                               Item Categories.
  485.  
  486.             Bank Account      A Bank Account refers to any money on deposit
  487.                               with a financial institution (Checking,
  488.                               Savings, CD, Money Market, Mutual Fund, etc.).
  489.  
  490.             Fund              A Fund is used to keep track of income for
  491.                               specific areas such as budget items, church
  492.                               building and improvement within one or more
  493.                               Bank Accounts. The total money posted to all
  494.                               Funds that is deposited to a single Bank
  495.                               Account equals the total money in that Bank
  496.                               Account.
  497.  
  498.             Report Grouping   A Report Grouping is used to group the Budget
  499.                               Item/Categories within a Fund into logical
  500.                               groupings (Example: Church, Parsonage, etc.).
  501.  
  502.             Budget            A Budget Item/Category is used to record
  503.             Item/Category     specific expenses and designated (targeted)
  504.                               income within a Fund.
  505.  
  506.                               Example:
  507.  
  508.                               Bank Account: Checking Account
  509.  
  510.  
  511.  
  512.  
  513.  
  514.  
  515.  
  516.  
  517.  
  518.  
  519.                                                                          1-1
  520.  
  521.                                                              Getting Started
  522.                                           Organizing Your Church Information
  523.  
  524.  
  525.                               FUND: General Operating Fund
  526.                                   Report Grouping: Church Expenses
  527.                                        Budget Item/Category: Phone
  528.                                        Budget Item/Category: Electric
  529.                                        Budget Item/Category: Heating
  530.                                   Report Grouping: Parsonage Expenses
  531.                                        Budget Item/Category: Phone
  532.                                        Budget Item/Category: Electric
  533.                                        Budget Item/Category: Heating
  534.  
  535.                               FUND: Improvement Fund
  536.                                   Report Grouping: Buildings
  537.                                        Budget Item/Category: Church
  538.                                        Budget Item/Category: Parsonage
  539.                                   Report Grouping: Grounds
  540.                                        Budget Item/Category: Church
  541.                                        Budget Item/Category: Parsonage
  542.  
  543.                               FUND: Pass-thru (Money To Other Agencies)
  544.                                   Report Grouping: Outreach
  545.                                        Budget Item/Category: Benevolence
  546.                                        Budget Item/Category: World Hunger
  547.  
  548.                               Bank Account: Savings
  549.  
  550.                               FUND: Improvement Fund
  551.                                   Report Grouping: Buildings
  552.                                        Budget Item/Category: Church
  553.                                        Budget Item/Category: Parsonage
  554.                                   Report Grouping: Grounds
  555.                                        Budget Item/Category: Church
  556.                                        Budget Item/Category: Parsonage
  557.  
  558.                               In the previous example, note that there is
  559.                               money in both the Checking Account and the
  560.                               Savings Account that belongs to the
  561.                               Improvement Fund.
  562.  
  563.                               Funds, Report Groupings and Budget
  564.                               Item/Categories are not limited to a specific
  565.                               Bank Account. The computer will keep track of
  566.                               the money in specific Funds and Budget
  567.                               Item/Categories that have money in different
  568.                               Bank Accounts.
  569.  
  570.                               Income is recorded and posted to:
  571.  
  572.                                 . A Fund for general use by any budget items
  573.                                   or categories within the Fund
  574.  
  575.  
  576.  
  577.                                                                          1-2
  578.  
  579.                                                              Getting Started
  580.                                           Organizing Your Church Information
  581.  
  582.  
  583.                                 . A specific Budget Item/Category within a
  584.                                   Fund (This is money designated or targeted
  585.                                   to be used for expenses only for the
  586.                                   specific Budget Item or Category to which
  587.                                   the money is posted.)
  588.  
  589.                               Expenses are deducted only from specific
  590.                               Budget Item/Categories.
  591.  
  592.                               Records of church income and expenses should
  593.                               be kept so actual income and actual expenses
  594.                               of the church are reflected on the reports.
  595.  
  596.                               Example:
  597.  
  598.                               Money is donated to Benevolence each week.
  599.                               This money is not actual income to the Local
  600.                               Church. This money is passed on to another
  601.                               church agency. This money should not show up
  602.                               as income to the Local Church when you print
  603.                               or display certain reports.
  604.  
  605.                               You may want to put all moneys that are passed
  606.                               on to other agencies into a Pass Through Fund.
  607.                               This would allow you to choose not to include
  608.                               this Fund in reports that reflect actual
  609.                               church income and expenses, but could be
  610.                               included in reports that would include
  611.                               Benevolence donations.
  612.  
  613.                               The following is a suggestion on how to set up
  614.                               your Bank Accounts, Funds, Report Groupings
  615.                               and Budget Item/Categories.
  616.  
  617.                               If you are presently using a system of
  618.                               accounting (Funds, Budget Item/Category
  619.                               coding) that will adapt to the VIANSOFT(R)
  620.                               Church Treasurer, you may use the same system.
  621.                               You should read through the following
  622.                               suggested set up to determine if your current
  623.                               system is easily adaptable. After reading the
  624.                               suggested set up, you will have a better idea
  625.                               of how VIANSOFT(R) handles Funds, Report
  626.                               Groupings and Budget Item/Categories.
  627.  
  628.                               Take the time now to determine your church's
  629.                               Budget Item/Category, Report Grouping and Fund
  630.                               requirements. You may be able to use the
  631.                               Treasurer's Annual Report from last year to
  632.                               help determine the Funds, Report Groupings and
  633.                               Budget Item/Categories you will need.
  634.  
  635.                                                                          1-3
  636.  
  637.                                                              Getting Started
  638.                                                         Set Up Bank Accounts
  639.  
  640.  
  641.                               As you progress through the following
  642.                               instructions, you will make an outline showing
  643.                               all current Budget Items/Categories that would
  644.                               be attached to a Report Grouping and Fund.
  645.  
  646.                               Hard Disk System:
  647.  
  648.                               The number of transaction line items that can
  649.                               be stored on your hard disk is based on the
  650.                               available disk space.
  651.  
  652.                               Floppy Disk System:
  653.  
  654.                               Keep in mind as you set up your Bank Accounts,
  655.                               Funds, Report Groupings and Budget
  656.                               Items/Categories that the number of
  657.                               transaction line items that can be stored on
  658.                               one floppy disk is determined by disk space
  659.                               and the number of Bank Accounts, Funds, Report
  660.                               Groupings and Budget Items/Categories you
  661.                               enter into the computer.
  662.  
  663.                               For example, a church with 5 Bank Accounts and
  664.                               a combined total of 150 Funds, Report
  665.                               Groupings and Budget Items/Categories will
  666.                               have room to store approximately 1600 line
  667.                               items on one 360K floppy disk (720K and high
  668.                               density disks will store proportionately
  669.                               more). (Remember that when the first disk is
  670.                               full, recording and posting will continue on a
  671.                               second disk, and so on.)  Consider this
  672.                               flexibility as you set up your floppy disk
  673.                               system.
  674.  
  675.          SET UP BANK ACCOUNTS
  676.  
  677.                               Take a sheet of paper. Write the type of Bank
  678.                               Account and Bank Name for each Bank Account.
  679.                               Put them in order from most active to least
  680.                               active.
  681.  
  682.                               Example:
  683.  
  684.                               Checking: Town Savings (#223-123-35)
  685.                               Checking: Morris Savings (#546-456-1)
  686.                               Savings: United Bank  (#545-3456867)
  687.                               Savings: Washington Loan (#282-5647584)
  688.                               CD: Town Savings (#525-152-32)
  689.                               CD: City Savings (#6989-201-5)
  690.  
  691.  
  692.  
  693.                                                                          1-4
  694.  
  695.                                                              Getting Started
  696.                                                                 Set Up Funds
  697.  
  698.  
  699.                               A maximum of 15 Bank Accounts can be used with
  700.                               VIANSOFT(R).
  701.  
  702.          SET UP FUNDS
  703.  
  704.                               A Fund is used to record income to be used for
  705.                               expenses for a specified group of budget items
  706.                               or categories. The total money within a Bank
  707.                               Account is recorded and posted to one or more
  708.                               Funds.
  709.  
  710.                               A Fund can have money to be used for an
  711.                               expense of any Budget Item or Category within
  712.                               it. This is income to the Fund "At Large". The
  713.                               General Operating Fund (the Fund where Budget
  714.                               expenses are deducted) is one Fund that will
  715.                               receive income to the Fund "At Large".
  716.  
  717.                               A Fund can have income that is posted to a
  718.                               specific Budget Item or Category within the
  719.                               Fund. The Improvement Fund can have money
  720.                               donated specifically for the church building
  721.                               improvement as well as money donated for
  722.                               overall improvement (Parsonage, grounds,
  723.                               etc.).
  724.  
  725.                               From the sheet listing the church Bank
  726.                               Accounts you have just completed, locate the
  727.                               main checking account (this is the checking
  728.                               account that is most active in paying budget
  729.                               item expenses).
  730.  
  731.                               On another sheet of paper, write the Fund name
  732.                               that would be used in this Bank Account (main
  733.                               checking account) to keep track of budget item
  734.                               expenses. (Suggestion:  General Operation
  735.                               Fund).
  736.  
  737.                               Leave room on the sheet to include all
  738.                               necessary Budget Items under the General
  739.                               Operation Fund.
  740.  
  741.                               All Local Church income not donated to a
  742.                               specific area (a specific Fund, Budget Item or
  743.                               Category) is income to the General Operation
  744.                               Fund. This includes Local Church pledged and
  745.                               non-pledged contributions. Budget Item
  746.                               expenses for the operation of the church
  747.                               (heating, repairs, books, pastor salary, etc.)
  748.                               will be deducted from the General Operation
  749.  
  750.  
  751.                                                                          1-5
  752.  
  753.                                                              Getting Started
  754.                                               Set Up Budget Items/Categories
  755.  
  756.  
  757.                               Fund automatically since they are Budget Items
  758.                               within that Fund.
  759.  
  760.                               Down near the bottom of the sheet or on the
  761.                               other side, write the name of other Funds
  762.                               within the main checking account (Improvement,
  763.                               Building, Pass-thru, Organ, etc.). Leave room
  764.                               for the Budget Items or Categories to be
  765.                               written underneath each Fund name.
  766.  
  767.                               Look at the other Bank Accounts (other
  768.                               checking, savings, CD, etc.). Are there any
  769.                               Funds in any of the remaining Bank Accounts
  770.                               that are not listed on your sheet?  If so, add
  771.                               them to the same list leaving room to write
  772.                               budget items or categories underneath (you
  773.                               will have one list of Funds).
  774.  
  775.                               Note: The Fund name need only be listed once
  776.                                     in the computer although you may find
  777.                                     that the same Fund has money in more
  778.                                     than one Bank Account. (Example: The
  779.                                     Building Fund has money in a Savings
  780.                                     Account as well as the Main Checking
  781.                                     Account).
  782.  
  783.          SET UP BUDGET ITEMS/CATEGORIES
  784.  
  785.                               Once you have the Funds on your sheet, fill in
  786.                               the Budget Items/Categories under each Fund.
  787.                               Use last year's Treasurer's Report to assist
  788.                               you, if necessary.
  789.  
  790.          SET UP REPORT GROUPINGS
  791.  
  792.                               A Report Grouping will group Budget
  793.                               Item/Category information within a Fund on a
  794.                               report. There are many reports that you can
  795.                               print by Report Grouping.
  796.  
  797.                               Decide how you want the Budget
  798.                               Items/Categories within a Fund grouped for
  799.                               reporting purposes. (Refer to the last year's
  800.                               Treasurer's Report). The Report Grouping you
  801.                               choose should be the way you want the Budget
  802.                               Items/Categories to appear on the report most
  803.                               of the time. You will be able to get sub-
  804.                               totals for each Report Grouping.
  805.  
  806.  
  807.  
  808.  
  809.                                                                          1-6
  810.  
  811.                                                              Getting Started
  812.                                                       Assigning Number Codes
  813.  
  814.  
  815.                               Example:
  816.  
  817.                               The Parsonage budget expenses under one Report
  818.                               Group and the Church budget expenses under
  819.                               another Report Group within the same Fund.
  820.  
  821.                               Every Budget Item/Category in a Fund must be
  822.                               assigned to a Report Group.
  823.  
  824.                               Note: VIANSOFT(R) allows you the flexibility
  825.                                     of choosing any single Budget
  826.                                     Item/Category or any combination of
  827.                                     Budget Items/Categories to be included
  828.                                     on a report at the time the report is
  829.                                     printed.
  830.  
  831.          ASSIGNING NUMBER CODES
  832.  
  833.                               Once you have your Bank Accounts, Funds,
  834.                               Report Groupings and Budget Item/Categories
  835.                               outlined, you will assign number codes to
  836.                               them.
  837.  
  838.             Bank Accounts     You may use letters or numbers or a
  839.                               combination (up to 8 characters, no spaces)
  840.                               for each Bank Account.
  841.  
  842.                               Example:
  843.  
  844.                               Main Checking Account: MainCk
  845.  
  846.                               Savings Account: Sav
  847.  
  848.             Funds             Funds should be coded with numbers at even
  849.                               thousands.
  850.  
  851.                               Example:
  852.  
  853.                               General Operation Fund: 1000
  854.  
  855.                               Improvement Fund: 2000
  856.  
  857.                               Building Fund: 3000
  858.  
  859.                               Assign even thousand numbers to the Funds so
  860.                               you will be able to assign numbers (within the
  861.                               thousand number of the Fund) to the Report
  862.                               Groupings and Budget Items/Categories.
  863.  
  864.             Report Groupings  Report Groupings should be coded with even
  865.                               hundreds (1100, 1200, 1300, etc.).
  866.  
  867.                                                                          1-7
  868.  
  869.                                                              Getting Started
  870.                                                       Assigning Number Codes
  871.  
  872.  
  873.                               Example:
  874.  
  875.                               General Operation Fund: 1000
  876.  
  877.                               Report Groupings:
  878.  
  879.                                   Church:        1100
  880.                                   Parsonage:     1200
  881.  
  882.                               If you need more than nine report groupings
  883.                               within a Fund, you can code the Report
  884.                               Groupings by fifties (1050, 1100, 1150, 1200,
  885.                               etc.).
  886.  
  887.             Budget            Budget Item/Categories should be coded with
  888.             Items/Categories  numbers that are within the Report Grouping
  889.                               number codes.
  890.  
  891.                               Example:
  892.  
  893.                               General Operation Fund: 1000
  894.  
  895.                                   Report Grouping: Church 1100
  896.  
  897.                                        Budget Items/Categories:
  898.                                             Phone 1110
  899.                                             Electric 1120
  900.                                             Heating 1130
  901.  
  902.                                   Report Grouping: Parsonage 1200
  903.  
  904.                                        Budget Items/Categories:
  905.                                             Phone 1210
  906.                                             Electric 1220
  907.                                             Heating 1230
  908.  
  909.                               If there are more than nine budget items
  910.                               within a Report Grouping, you may number the
  911.                               budget items by fives (1105, 1110, 1115, 1120,
  912.                               etc.).
  913.  
  914.                               Numbers are skipped now to leave room to add
  915.                               numbers later if you want to include a new
  916.                               Budget Item/Category in a Report Group or
  917.                               Fund.
  918.  
  919.                               Note: A new Fund, Report Grouping or Budget
  920.                                     Item/Category can be added at any time.
  921.  
  922.  
  923.  
  924.  
  925.                                                                          1-8
  926.  
  927.                                                              Getting Started
  928.                                              Installing the Church Treasurer
  929.  
  930.  
  931.                               The Funds, Report Groups and Budget
  932.                               Items/Categories will have the same numbers
  933.                               you assigned within all Bank Accounts.
  934.  
  935.                               You may use any number from 1 to 99999 for a
  936.                               Fund, Report Grouping or Budget Item/Category.
  937.  
  938.                               When you have completed your outline with the
  939.                               Bank Account, Fund, Report Grouping and Budget
  940.                               Item/Category Code numbers, you are ready to
  941.                               set up the program on your computer system.
  942.  
  943.          INSTALLING THE VIANSOFT(R) CHURCH TREASURER ON YOUR COMPUTER
  944.  
  945.                               TAKE YOUR TIME. DO NOT RUSH THROUGH THE SET
  946.                               UP.
  947.  
  948.                               The set up procedure will be done once.
  949.  
  950.                               Refer to the monitor screen between each step
  951.                               to see how the instruction in the manual
  952.                               compares with the display on the screen.
  953.  
  954.                               Check off each step as you complete it.
  955.  
  956.                               Note: If you have a Dual Floppy Disk System
  957.                                     turn to Appendix C. If you have a Single
  958.                                     Floppy Disk System, turn to Appendix D.
  959.  
  960.                               1.    Read the instructions supplied with your
  961.                                     computer system on its proper hookup and
  962.                                     operation. Follow them carefully.
  963.  
  964.                               2.    (DOS should already be on your hard
  965.                                     disk.)
  966.  
  967.                                     Turn on the power to the computer
  968.                                     system.
  969.  
  970.                                     (If your computer system sets the date
  971.                                     and time automatically, skip Steps 3 and
  972.                                     4.)
  973.  
  974.                               3.    When the disk drive stops, type the date
  975.                                     (mm/dd/yy) <Enter>
  976.  
  977.                               4.    For the time, press  <Enter>
  978.  
  979.                               5.    At the prompt (>), put the VIANSOFT(R)
  980.                                     Church Treasurer TUTORIAL-TRIAL DISK in
  981.                                     drive A.
  982.  
  983.                                                                          1-9
  984.  
  985.                                                              Getting Started
  986.                                                Starting the Church Treasurer
  987.  
  988.  
  989.                               6.    Type: a:install  <Enter>
  990.  
  991.                               7.    At the First-time User Instruction
  992.                                     Screen, press <Enter>.
  993.  
  994.                               8.    From the Installation Menu, select
  995.                                     N)otes to Printer. This will print
  996.                                     information that was unavailable when
  997.                                     this User's Manual was printed.
  998.  
  999.                               9.    From the Installation Menu, select
  1000.                                     I)nstall Program and follow the
  1001.                                     instructions on the screen.
  1002.  
  1003.          STARTING THE VIANSOFT(R) CHURCH TREASURER
  1004.  
  1005.                        Note: If you hear a beep while working with the
  1006.                              program, look at the bottom of the screen for a
  1007.                              message. The beep indicates that a key has been
  1008.                              pressed that is not allowed at that time or
  1009.                              when an important procedure should be brought
  1010.                              to your attention. The message will tell you
  1011.                              what has happened and what you should do.
  1012.  
  1013.             Hard Disk         At C>, type: cd tr  <Enter>
  1014.  
  1015.                               Continue with Step 4 under Dual Floppy Disk
  1016.                               that follows.
  1017.  
  1018.             Single Floppy     Put DOS COPY disk in drive A. Start up
  1019.                               computer system. When you see the A>, remove
  1020.                               DOS COPY disk and put in your PROGRAM/POSTING
  1021.                               INFORMATION DISK. Continue with Step 4 under
  1022.                               Dual Floppy on the next page.
  1023.  
  1024.             Dual Floppy Disk  (Do not power up system.)
  1025.  
  1026.                               1.    Place the disk you labeled PROGRAM DISK
  1027.                                     in drive A.
  1028.  
  1029.                               2.    Place the POSTING INFORMATION DISK in
  1030.                                     drive B.
  1031.  
  1032.                               3.    If you are continuing from the previous
  1033.                                     section, you should see an A> on the
  1034.                                     screen (to the left of the cursor - the
  1035.                                     blinking underline).
  1036.  
  1037.                                     -OR-
  1038.  
  1039.  
  1040.  
  1041.                                                                         1-10
  1042.  
  1043.                                                              Getting Started
  1044.                                                     Enter Church Information
  1045.  
  1046.  
  1047.                                     If your computer system is not powered
  1048.                                     up, turn on the power at this time.
  1049.                                     (Answer questions for date and time (if
  1050.                                     applicable). Press <Enter> after each as
  1051.                                     you did before.)
  1052.  
  1053.                               4.    Type: ct  <Enter>
  1054.  
  1055.                                     Remember, wait for the disk drives to
  1056.                                     stop.
  1057.  
  1058.                               5.    The Title Screen and Copyright Notice
  1059.                                     for the VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer is
  1060.                                     displayed on your monitor.
  1061.  
  1062.                                     Color (Y/N)?  Type: y (for Yes) or n
  1063.                                     (for No)
  1064.  
  1065.                                     Are you an experienced computer user
  1066.                                     (Y/N)?
  1067.  
  1068.                                     Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No)
  1069.  
  1070.                               6.    The MAIN MENU is displayed on the
  1071.                                     screen.
  1072.  
  1073.                                     A menu is a list of options of which you
  1074.                                     can choose one. Look at the options
  1075.                                     displayed on the MAIN MENU screen.
  1076.  
  1077.                               7.    Type: d (for Display/Edit Menu)
  1078.  
  1079.          ENTER CHURCH INFORMATION
  1080.  
  1081.                               You must enter your church information first
  1082.                               to unlock the program so you can enter the
  1083.                               Funds, Report Groupings and Budget
  1084.                               Item/Categories.
  1085.  
  1086.                               Turn to page 6-14 in this manual. Complete all
  1087.                               entries in Church Information Display/Edit
  1088.                               except the Default Bank Account Code and
  1089.                               Default Fund Code and return here. (After
  1090.                               entering your church information, the
  1091.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU should again be displayed on
  1092.                               your screen.)
  1093.  
  1094.          ENTER FUND INFORMATION
  1095.  
  1096.                               You will now enter the Fund Codes you have
  1097.                               assigned to your Funds (from your outline).
  1098.  
  1099.                                                                         1-11
  1100.  
  1101.                                                              Getting Started
  1102.                                            Enter Report Grouping Information
  1103.  
  1104.  
  1105.                               1.    From the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU,
  1106.  
  1107.                                     Type: f (for Fund)
  1108.  
  1109.                                     Fund Code files missing. Create new
  1110.                                     files (Y/N)?
  1111.  
  1112.                               2.    You wish to establish files for the
  1113.                                     Funds during this set up procedure.
  1114.  
  1115.                                     Type: y (for Yes)
  1116.  
  1117.                                     The FUND DISPLAY/EDIT MENU is displayed
  1118.                                     on the monitor.
  1119.  
  1120.                                     You want to Add Funds. Turn to page 6-9.
  1121.                                     Enter all Fund information from your
  1122.                                     outline and return here.
  1123.  
  1124.                               The DISPLAY/EDIT MENU should again be
  1125.                               displayed on your screen after entering all
  1126.                               Fund information.
  1127.  
  1128.          ENTER REPORT GROUPING INFORMATION
  1129.  
  1130.                               You will now enter the Report Grouping Codes
  1131.                               you have assigned to your Report Groups (from
  1132.                               your outline).
  1133.  
  1134.                               From the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU,
  1135.  
  1136.                               Type: r (for Report Group)
  1137.  
  1138.                               The REPORT GROUPING DISPLAY/EDIT MENU is
  1139.                               displayed on the monitor screen.
  1140.  
  1141.                               You want to Add a Report Group. Turn to page
  1142.                               6-6. Enter all Report Grouping Codes and
  1143.                               information (from your outline) and return
  1144.                               here.
  1145.  
  1146.                               The DISPLAY/EDIT MENU should be displayed on
  1147.                               the monitor.
  1148.  
  1149.          ENTER BUDGET ITEM/CATEGORY INFORMATION
  1150.  
  1151.                               You will now enter the Budget Item/Category
  1152.                               Codes you have assigned to your Budget Items
  1153.                               or Categories (from your outline).
  1154.  
  1155.                               From the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU,
  1156.  
  1157.                                                                         1-12
  1158.  
  1159.                                                              Getting Started
  1160.                                               Enter Bank Account Information
  1161.  
  1162.  
  1163.                               Type: b (for Budget Item/Category)
  1164.  
  1165.                               The BUDGET ITEM/CATEGORY DISPLAY/EDIT MENU is
  1166.                               displayed on your screen.
  1167.  
  1168.                               You want to Add Budget Items/Categories. Turn
  1169.                               to page 6-3. Enter all Budget Item/Category
  1170.                               Codes and information (from your outline) and
  1171.                               return here.
  1172.  
  1173.                               The DISPLAY/EDIT MENU should again be
  1174.                               displayed on your screen after entering all
  1175.                               Budget Items/Categories.
  1176.  
  1177.          ENTER BANK ACCOUNT INFORMATION
  1178.  
  1179.                               You will now enter the Bank Account Codes you
  1180.                               have assigned to your Bank Accounts (from your
  1181.                               outline).
  1182.  
  1183.                               From the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU,
  1184.  
  1185.                               Type: a (for Bank Account)
  1186.  
  1187.                               The BANK ACCOUNT DISPLAY/EDIT MENU is
  1188.                               displayed on your screen.
  1189.  
  1190.                               You want to Add Bank Accounts. Turn to page 6-
  1191.                               12. Enter all Bank Account Codes (from your
  1192.                               outline) beginning with the most active to the
  1193.                               least active and return here.
  1194.  
  1195.                               The DISPLAY/EDIT MENU should again be
  1196.                               displayed on your screen after entering all
  1197.                               Bank Accounts.
  1198.  
  1199.          SET BANK ACCOUNT AND FUND CODE DEFAULT
  1200.  
  1201.                               With the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU displayed on the
  1202.                               monitor, type c (for Church Information).
  1203.  
  1204.                               Turn to the Default Bank Account Code and
  1205.                               Default Fund Code set up on page 6-16.
  1206.  
  1207.                               Press <Enter> to move the cursor to the
  1208.                               Default Bank Account Code position.
  1209.  
  1210.                               Read explanation of the Default Bank Account
  1211.                               Code.
  1212.  
  1213.  
  1214.  
  1215.                                                                         1-13
  1216.  
  1217.                                                              Getting Started
  1218.                            Recording and Posting Income and Expenses to Date
  1219.  
  1220.  
  1221.                               Move the cursor to the Default Fund Code
  1222.                               position.
  1223.  
  1224.                               Read explanation of the Default Fund Code.
  1225.  
  1226.                               Return to the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU. (Ctrl-q)
  1227.  
  1228.                               Return to the MAIN MENU. (q (for Quit))
  1229.  
  1230.                               Note: It is recommended that you make a
  1231.                                     temporary backup of the information you
  1232.                                     have just entered using normal backup
  1233.                                     procedures as described in the General
  1234.                                     Information Section under Backup. This
  1235.                                     backup would be used if you make a
  1236.                                     mistake during the next phase of the set
  1237.                                     up process. You would not have to redo
  1238.                                     the set up from the beginning.
  1239.  
  1240.          RECORDING AND POSTING INCOME AND EXPENSES TO DATE
  1241.  
  1242.                               You will enter all dollar amounts into the
  1243.                               computer for all Funds and Budget
  1244.                               Item/Category codes that contained money as of
  1245.                               the first of the current year. The sum of all
  1246.                               of the entries you make into the computer
  1247.                               should equal the sum of the balances of all
  1248.                               Bank Accounts as of the first of the year.
  1249.  
  1250.                               1.    You will enter the total dollar amounts
  1251.                                     in each Fund or Budget Item/Category for
  1252.                                     all money as of the first of the year.
  1253.  
  1254.                                     For each Bank Account, you will do the
  1255.                                     following (complete all steps for one
  1256.                                     Bank Account before starting another)
  1257.  
  1258.                                     Note: be sure you are working in the
  1259.                                           correct Bank Account.
  1260.  
  1261.                                     Access the ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU from
  1262.                                     the MAIN MENU.
  1263.  
  1264.                                     Access the BALANCE FORWARD screen (Type
  1265.                                     b (for Balance Forward).
  1266.  
  1267.                                     Set the Posting Date to: 1-1-YY (the
  1268.                                     current year).
  1269.  
  1270.                                     You want to enter money carried forward
  1271.                                     for each Fund and Budget Item/Category
  1272.  
  1273.                                                                         1-14
  1274.  
  1275.                                                              Getting Started
  1276.                            Recording and Posting Income and Expenses to Date
  1277.  
  1278.  
  1279.                                     from the previous year to the current
  1280.                                     year.
  1281.  
  1282.                                     Use as many BALANCE FORWARD screens as
  1283.                                     necessary to record and post the first
  1284.                                     of the year information to the Bank
  1285.                                     Account.
  1286.  
  1287.                               2.    Enter total income for each Fund and
  1288.                                     Budget Item/Category from the first of
  1289.                                     the year through the last date of the
  1290.                                     previous month or the date of the last
  1291.                                     statement.
  1292.  
  1293.                                     Access the ENTER INCOME screen. (From
  1294.                                     the ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU.)
  1295.  
  1296.                                     Set the Posting Date to the last date of
  1297.                                     the previous month or date of the last
  1298.                                     statement.
  1299.  
  1300.                                     The comment should show: 1-1-YY thru
  1301.                                     (last date of previous month or last
  1302.                                     statement date).
  1303.  
  1304.                                     Enter total income (one figure amount
  1305.                                     for each Fund and/or Budget
  1306.                                     Item/Category) from the first of the
  1307.                                     year through the last date of the
  1308.                                     previous month or last statement.
  1309.  
  1310.                               3.    Access the ENTER EXPENSE screen. (From
  1311.                                     the ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU.)
  1312.  
  1313.                                     Set the Posting Date to the last date of
  1314.                                     the previous month or date of the last
  1315.                                     statement.
  1316.  
  1317.                                     Press the Up Arrow key to move the
  1318.                                     cursor to the Check Number field. Do not
  1319.                                     use a check number for this entry. Press
  1320.                                     DEL (delete) to erase check number;
  1321.                                     leave set at zero.
  1322.  
  1323.                                     Payable to should be left blank (Press
  1324.                                     <Enter>).
  1325.  
  1326.                                     The comment should show: 1-1-YY thru
  1327.                                     (last date of previous month or last
  1328.                                     statement).
  1329.  
  1330.  
  1331.                                                                         1-15
  1332.  
  1333.                                                              Getting Started
  1334.                            Recording and Posting Income and Expenses to Date
  1335.  
  1336.  
  1337.                                     Enter total expense (one figure amount
  1338.                                     for each Budget Item/Category) from the
  1339.                                     first of the year through the last date
  1340.                                     of the previous month or date of last
  1341.                                     statement.
  1342.  
  1343.                               4.    Repeat the preceding process (Steps 1-3)
  1344.                                     for each church Bank Account.
  1345.  
  1346.                               5.    If you have more than one Bank Account
  1347.                                     and there have been transfers between
  1348.                                     them, use the ENTER TRANSFER screen to
  1349.                                     adjust balances for the Bank Accounts.
  1350.  
  1351.                               6.    At this point, you will print the
  1352.                                     TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE (Journal)
  1353.                                     (type l (for List)) for a printed record
  1354.                                     of the transactions you just entered.
  1355.                                     Print the Journal for each Bank Account.
  1356.  
  1357.                               7.    Next, print the ALL BANK ACCOUNTS
  1358.                                     SUMMARY report (from the REPORTS MENU).
  1359.                                     Compare each Bank Account balance in the
  1360.                                     computer with your record of the Bank
  1361.                                     Account balance as of the last date of
  1362.                                     the previous month or last statement.
  1363.  
  1364.                                     Note: If the balances are not the same,
  1365.                                           find and correct the error. The
  1366.                                           balance in the computer and the
  1367.                                           balance in your records as of the
  1368.                                           last date of the previous month
  1369.                                           (or last statement) must be the
  1370.                                           same before you continue.
  1371.  
  1372.                               8.    Next, print the LOCATION OF FUNDS report
  1373.                                     (from the REPORTS MENU). This report
  1374.                                     will show the distribution of money in
  1375.                                     each Fund in each Bank Account.
  1376.  
  1377.                               9.    Print a list of the Item Codes and Bank
  1378.                                     Account Codes (from the REPORTS MENU).
  1379.  
  1380.                               10.   On a separate sheet of paper (or copies
  1381.                                     of the VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer
  1382.                                     Entry Sheet - found on the last page of
  1383.                                     this manual) mark the transactions for
  1384.                                     each Bank Account for the current month
  1385.                                     or after the last statement (to date).
  1386.  
  1387.  
  1388.  
  1389.                                                                         1-16
  1390.  
  1391.                                                              Getting Started
  1392.                                                                         Quit
  1393.  
  1394.  
  1395.                                     Indicate the following information for
  1396.                                     each transaction from the first of the
  1397.                                     current month to date:
  1398.  
  1399.                                     Transaction Type (Tran. Type) (See page
  1400.                                     180 for complete Transaction Type Code
  1401.                                     List)).
  1402.  
  1403.                                     Check Number (Check #) (if applicable
  1404.                                     for the entry).
  1405.  
  1406.                                     Posting Date (Posting Date).
  1407.  
  1408.                                     Total Entry Amount (Total Entry Amount).
  1409.  
  1410.                                     Payable To/Comment.
  1411.  
  1412.                                     Fund or Item Code (Fund/Item Code).
  1413.  
  1414.                                     Code Amount (The amount recorded and
  1415.                                     posted for the Fund or Budget
  1416.                                     Item/Category involved).
  1417.  
  1418.                                     Note: You may need to use more than one
  1419.                                           line in the Detail section of the
  1420.                                           Entry Sheet if the Total Entry
  1421.                                           Amount is distributed between more
  1422.                                           than one Code.
  1423.  
  1424.                               11.   Enter into the computer all income,
  1425.                                     expenses, transfers, etc. into the
  1426.                                     correct Budget Item/Category or Fund
  1427.                                     from the beginning of the current month
  1428.                                     (or after last statement) to the current
  1429.                                     date (in date order) for each Bank
  1430.                                     Account.
  1431.  
  1432.                               12.   Print the TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE
  1433.                                     (Journal) again for a final printed
  1434.                                     record of all the transactions you just
  1435.                                     entered. Print the Journal for each Bank
  1436.                                     Account.
  1437.  
  1438.          QUIT
  1439.  
  1440.                               Exit (Quit) the program by typing q (for Quit)
  1441.                               from the MAIN MENU.
  1442.  
  1443.                               This completes the SET UP of the VIANSOFT(R)
  1444.                               Church Treasurer.
  1445.  
  1446.  
  1447.                                                                         1-17
  1448.  
  1449.                                                              Getting Started
  1450.                                                  Completing Set up of System
  1451.  
  1452.  
  1453.                               Make a backup copy (or two) of the posting
  1454.                               information as it stands at this time. You
  1455.                               should have all the information up to the
  1456.                               current date.
  1457.  
  1458.                               Put a copy of this backup away in case you
  1459.                               need to refer to it in the near future. It is
  1460.                               recommended that you keep an extra copy of the
  1461.                               posting information as it is at the end of
  1462.                               each month in your archives. This would mean
  1463.                               that if the information on the disk you use
  1464.                               became damaged, you would only have to
  1465.                               reconstruct the information from the beginning
  1466.                               of the current or previous month.
  1467.  
  1468.          COMPLETING THE SET UP OF THE SYSTEM
  1469.  
  1470.                               IMPORTANT: MAKE A BACKUP OF THE SYSTEM
  1471.                               (PROGRAM AND POSTING INFORMATION) AS IT IS AT
  1472.                               THIS TIME.
  1473.  
  1474.             Hard Disk         Follow back up procedure discussed in the
  1475.                               GENERAL INFORMATION section of the manual.
  1476.  
  1477.             Dual Floppy Disk  Follow the BACKUP procedure discussed in the
  1478.                               GENERAL INFORMATION section of this manual.
  1479.  
  1480.                               Make a copy of your Posting Information disk
  1481.                               onto the Posting Information Back Up #1 and
  1482.                               #2.
  1483.  
  1484.             Single Floppy     Follow the Diskcopy (Back Up) procedure
  1485.             Disk              discussed in Appendix F, page 181.
  1486.  
  1487.                               Make a copy of your Program-Posting
  1488.                               Information Disk onto the Program-Posting
  1489.                               Information Disks Back Up #1 and #2.
  1490.  
  1491.  
  1492.  
  1493.  
  1494.  
  1495.  
  1496.  
  1497.  
  1498.  
  1499.  
  1500.  
  1501.  
  1502.  
  1503.  
  1504.  
  1505.                                                                         1-18
  1506.  
  1507.  
  1508.  
  1509.  
  1510.          GENERAL INFORMATION
  1511.  
  1512.  
  1513.          SELECTING A MAIN MENU OPTION
  1514.  
  1515.                               The MAIN MENU is displayed after the Title
  1516.                               Screen.
  1517.  
  1518.                               To make a selection from a menu, choose one of
  1519.                               the options listed on the screen. Press the
  1520.                               key corresponding to the first letter of the
  1521.                               option you choose.
  1522.  
  1523.          SUMMARY OF MAIN MENU OPTIONS
  1524.  
  1525.                               Summary of the selections possible from the
  1526.                               MAIN MENU.
  1527.             A) Bank Account   The Bank Account Code you are presently
  1528.             (Now ________)    working in is displayed. Change the Bank
  1529.                               Account by choosing this option.
  1530.  
  1531.             E)nter            Enter Income, Income Adjustments, Expenses,
  1532.             Transactions Menu Expense Adjustments, Transfers, Special
  1533.                               Transactions and Balance Forward from this
  1534.                               section of the program.
  1535.  
  1536.             R)eports Menu     Print reports on Income, Expenses, Budget,
  1537.                               Funds, Bank Accounts, etc.
  1538.  
  1539.             D)isplay/Edit     Display, edit and add Budget Items, Report
  1540.             Menu              Groupings, Funds, Bank Accounts, and Church
  1541.                               Name and Address Information from this
  1542.                               section.
  1543.  
  1544.             P)rove Bank       Use this Main Menu option to assist you in
  1545.             Statement         proving the bank statement each month.
  1546.  
  1547.             U)tilities Menu   Choose this Main Menu option to set up a new
  1548.                               disk (floppy data disk system), set up the
  1549.                               files for the new year, repair index files,
  1550.                               check to see how much disk space has been used
  1551.                               for the records and translate information
  1552.                               files into a format that can be read by a word
  1553.                               processor or spread sheet program.
  1554.  
  1555.             S)ub Directory    (Hard Disk Only)
  1556.             (Now ________)
  1557.  
  1558.                               This Main Menu option displays the
  1559.                               subdirectory of the files in with which you
  1560.  
  1561.  
  1562.  
  1563.                                                                          2-1
  1564.  
  1565.                                                          General Information
  1566.                                                 Summary of Main Menu Options
  1567.  
  1568.  
  1569.                               are currently working. You can change the
  1570.                               subdirectory by choosing this option.
  1571.  
  1572.             S)et Floppy Disk  (Floppy Data Disk Only)
  1573.             Name (Now
  1574.             ________)
  1575.  
  1576.                               This Main Menu option displays the name of the
  1577.                               Posting Information Disk currently in your
  1578.                               data drive. When a Posting Information Disk is
  1579.                               first set up, the computer will assign the
  1580.                               name CTDAT (Church Treasurer Data) to it. If
  1581.                               you are using the program for more than one
  1582.                               organization within the church (Example:
  1583.                               Sunday School), you may rename a second
  1584.                               Posting Information Disk to reflect the name
  1585.                               of the organization.
  1586.  
  1587.             C)hange Floppy    (Floppy Data Disk Only)
  1588.             Disk (Now
  1589.             ________)
  1590.  
  1591.                               This Main Menu option displays the number of
  1592.                               the Posting Information Disk in your data
  1593.                               drive. The first Posting Information Disk you
  1594.                               have will be automatically numbered 1. When it
  1595.                               is nearly full, a message on the screen will
  1596.                               indicate that you should prepare a second
  1597.                               Posting Information Disk (using the New Disk
  1598.                               option in the Utilities Menu). The second disk
  1599.                               will be numbered 2, and so on. You can change
  1600.                               to previous numbered disks at the Main Menu to
  1601.                               display information and print reports.
  1602.  
  1603.                               Note: (Floppy Disk) The Posting Information
  1604.                                     Disk number currently in your data drive
  1605.                                     will be displayed at the upper left on
  1606.                                     your screen along with the Posting
  1607.                                     Information Disk name.
  1608.  
  1609.             Q)uit             End session (when selected from MAIN MENU).
  1610.  
  1611.          NORMAL RECORDING AND POSTING ROUTINE
  1612.  
  1613.                               There are two basic ways you can approach the
  1614.                               normal recording and posting of church
  1615.                               transactions.
  1616.  
  1617.                               1.    You can work directly with the computer
  1618.                                     and checkbook, entering the transactions
  1619.  
  1620.  
  1621.                                                                          2-2
  1622.  
  1623.                                                          General Information
  1624.                                                             Year End Routine
  1625.  
  1626.  
  1627.                                     into the computer at the time you write
  1628.                                     the checks.
  1629.  
  1630.                               2.    During the month, at the time the checks
  1631.                                     are written or deposits are made, you
  1632.                                     can use a copy of the VIANSOFT(R) Church
  1633.                                     Treasurer Entry Sheet (found on the last
  1634.                                     page of this manual) to keep track of
  1635.                                     the information for each transaction.
  1636.                                     Use a separate sheet for each Bank
  1637.                                     Account. You can then enter all
  1638.                                     transactions (for the week, two weeks,
  1639.                                     or month) during a single session. When
  1640.                                     you go to enter the transactions into
  1641.                                     the computer, you will have all the
  1642.                                     information you need on the Entry Sheet.
  1643.  
  1644.                               You will record and post income, expenses,
  1645.                               transfers, etc. within each Bank Account.
  1646.                               Change the Bank Account Code (at the Main
  1647.                               Menu) to record and post to other Bank
  1648.                               Accounts.
  1649.  
  1650.                               Print the TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE (Journal)
  1651.                               report. The list will show the order you
  1652.                               entered the items into the computer.
  1653.  
  1654.          YEAR END ROUTINE
  1655.  
  1656.                               At the end of the year, you will have to
  1657.                               consider the following:
  1658.  
  1659.                               The transactions for the year are not
  1660.                               completed until all deposits, checks,
  1661.                               interest, special charges, etc. have been
  1662.                               processed through the computer. Some of the
  1663.                               figures needed may not be available on 1st of
  1664.                               the new year.
  1665.  
  1666.                               To handle this special situation, follow the
  1667.                               procedure below for EACH Bank Account:
  1668.  
  1669.                               1.    Enter as many transactions for the old
  1670.                                     year as you can before the 1st of the
  1671.                                     new year.
  1672.  
  1673.                               2.    Print a List (Journal) of the
  1674.                                     transactions entered in Step 1.
  1675.  
  1676.                               3.    Before you enter any transactions for
  1677.                                     the new year, from the Main Menu, select
  1678.  
  1679.                                                                          2-3
  1680.  
  1681.                                                          General Information
  1682.                                                             Year End Routine
  1683.  
  1684.  
  1685.                                     Prove Bank Statement option. You want to
  1686.                                     print out the list of outstanding
  1687.                                     Income, Deposits and Expenses.
  1688.  
  1689.                                     Procedure
  1690.  
  1691.                                     Have you entered all charges and credits
  1692.                                     from your bank statement? (Y/N) Type: y
  1693.  
  1694.                                     Review: O)utstanding A)ll Q)uit
  1695.  
  1696.                                     Type: q (for Quit)
  1697.  
  1698.                                     Balance on Bank Account Statement:
  1699.  
  1700.                                     (Do not enter any amounts on this
  1701.                                     screen.)
  1702.  
  1703.                                     Press: Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) (to leave this
  1704.                                     screen)
  1705.  
  1706.                                     Output to: Type: p (for printer)
  1707.  
  1708.                                     Report Generated on printer.
  1709.  
  1710.                                     Keep this list of outstanding
  1711.                                     transactions until you receive the bank
  1712.                                     statement for the month.
  1713.  
  1714.                                     When you prove the bank statement, check
  1715.                                     off all transactions on the list that
  1716.                                     have cleared. Enter the total of income
  1717.                                     and total of expenses that have not
  1718.                                     cleared as "Outstanding transactions not
  1719.                                     on this disk" during the Prove Bank
  1720.                                     Statement option.
  1721.  
  1722.                                     Note: You will put any interest from
  1723.                                           December (or the last month of
  1724.                                           your fiscal year) on the old disk
  1725.                                           (for your yearly reports) and also
  1726.                                           on the new disk. You will use the
  1727.                                           Income entry option to enter last
  1728.                                           year's interest on the old disk
  1729.                                           (or the subdirectory containing
  1730.                                           last year's information).
  1731.  
  1732.                                     Use the Balance Forward entry option to
  1733.                                     enter last year's interest on the new
  1734.                                     disk (or in the current subdirectory).
  1735.  
  1736.  
  1737.                                                                          2-4
  1738.  
  1739.                                                          General Information
  1740.                                                             Year End Routine
  1741.  
  1742.  
  1743.                               4.    Make a backup of the Posting Information
  1744.                                     for the old year.
  1745.  
  1746.                                     Floppy: Make a copy of the Posting
  1747.                                     Information Disk.
  1748.  
  1749.                                     Hard Disk:   Backup all data files into
  1750.                                     a subdirectory named for the year.
  1751.                                     (Example: 1990)
  1752.  
  1753.                               5.    In the Utilities Menu, choose the Year
  1754.                                     End Option (Chapter 8). This option will
  1755.                                     set up your disk (or subdirectory) for
  1756.                                     the new year.
  1757.  
  1758.                                     Note: There are several year-end options
  1759.                                           that may be set in the Install
  1760.                                           option found in the Utilities
  1761.                                           Menu. Review these before you use
  1762.                                           the Year End option.
  1763.  
  1764.                                     Note: If there has been a designated
  1765.                                           contribution to a Budget Item and
  1766.                                           you did not overspend your budget
  1767.                                           for that item, the total
  1768.                                           designated contribution amount
  1769.                                           will be carried forward for the
  1770.                                           new year.
  1771.  
  1772.                                     If you overspent your budget for an item
  1773.                                     that has a designated contribution made
  1774.                                     to it, the computer will deduct the
  1775.                                     amount overspent from the designated
  1776.                                     contribution amount before carrying the
  1777.                                     designated contribution amount forward
  1778.                                     to the new year.
  1779.  
  1780.                                     If there is designated contribution
  1781.                                     money in more than one Bank Account for
  1782.                                     a specific item, the computer will
  1783.                                     deduct the amount overspent from the
  1784.                                     most active to the least active Bank
  1785.                                     Account until either the designated
  1786.                                     contribution amount for the item reaches
  1787.                                     zero or the overspent amount is equaled.
  1788.  
  1789.                                     The remainder of the designated
  1790.                                     contribution amount for the item is then
  1791.                                     carried forward to the new year.
  1792.  
  1793.  
  1794.  
  1795.                                                                          2-5
  1796.  
  1797.                                                          General Information
  1798.                                                             Year End Routine
  1799.  
  1800.  
  1801.                                     Work through the Year End Option and
  1802.                                     return here.
  1803.  
  1804.                               6.    After the Posting Information Disk (or
  1805.                                     subdirectory) is set for the new year,
  1806.                                     you may delete items with a zero balance
  1807.                                     that are no longer needed on the newly
  1808.                                     set up disk (or TR subdirectory).
  1809.  
  1810.                                     Note: On the disk or subdirectory set up
  1811.                                           for the new year, you may also
  1812.                                           rename, renumber or move any Fund,
  1813.                                           Report Grouping or Budget
  1814.                                           Item/Category.
  1815.  
  1816.                               7.    Print the TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE
  1817.                                     (JOURNAL) report to show the balance
  1818.                                     forward transactions for each Bank
  1819.                                     Account on the new disk.
  1820.  
  1821.                               8.    Print the LOCATION OF FUNDS report to
  1822.                                     show the distribution of money in all
  1823.                                     Bank Accounts for all items.
  1824.  
  1825.                               9.    Use the newly set up files to enter
  1826.                                     transactions from the first of the new
  1827.                                     year.
  1828.  
  1829.                                     Note: Remember, if you find it necessary
  1830.                                           to make further entries under the
  1831.                                           old year on the old disk or
  1832.                                           subdirectory (to include interest,
  1833.                                           etc.), make a corresponding entry
  1834.                                           on the new disk or subdirectory
  1835.                                           using the BALANCE FORWARD option
  1836.                                           in the ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU.
  1837.  
  1838.                               10.   Once you have completed the Steps for
  1839.                                     all Bank Accounts, make a backup copy of
  1840.                                     the old disk (or subdirectory) for
  1841.                                     archive purposes. (Hard Disk: Also copy
  1842.                                     the completed old year posting
  1843.                                     information to the subdirectory you
  1844.                                     named for the old year.)
  1845.  
  1846.                               11.   Back up the newly set up disk (or
  1847.                                     subdirectory) for the new year. Follow
  1848.                                     your normal procedures with your disk
  1849.                                     (or subdirectory) as you post
  1850.                                     information for the new year.
  1851.  
  1852.  
  1853.                                                                          2-6
  1854.  
  1855.                                                          General Information
  1856.                            Recording and Posting Church Activities to a Fund
  1857.  
  1858.  
  1859.          RECORDING AND POSTING CHURCH ACTIVITIES TO A FUND
  1860.  
  1861.                               You can track income and expenses for church
  1862.                               activities using a single church Bank Account.
  1863.  
  1864.                               Note: If you use a different Bank Account to
  1865.                                     pay expenses for an activity, transfer
  1866.                                     money to cover expenses for the activity
  1867.                                     to that different Bank Account. After
  1868.                                     the activity, transfer the same amount
  1869.                                     back to the Bank Account from which it
  1870.                                     came.
  1871.  
  1872.                               Example:
  1873.  
  1874.                               Fund: Church Activities
  1875.  
  1876.                                   Report Group: Pork & Oyster Supper
  1877.  
  1878.                                        Budget Item/Categories:
  1879.  
  1880.                                             Food
  1881.                                             Supplies
  1882.                                             Advertising
  1883.                                             Donations
  1884.                                             Ticket Sales
  1885.  
  1886.                                   Report Group: Christmas Bazaar
  1887.  
  1888.                                        Budget Item/Categories:  Food
  1889.  
  1890.                                             Supplies
  1891.                                             Donations
  1892.                                             Craft Sales
  1893.  
  1894.          RECORDING AND POSTING INCOME AND EXPENSES FOR ORGANIZATIONS WITHIN
  1895.          YOUR CHURCH
  1896.  
  1897.                               Each church organization that has separate
  1898.                               Bank Accounts (checking, savings, etc.) and
  1899.                               Fund, Report Grouping, Budget Item/Category
  1900.                               structure should use a separate subdirectory
  1901.                               or set of floppy disks to store the
  1902.                               information.
  1903.  
  1904.               Hard Disk       The program will not be able to combine
  1905.                               Posting Information from different
  1906.                               subdirectories on a single report.
  1907.  
  1908.  
  1909.  
  1910.  
  1911.                                                                          2-7
  1912.  
  1913.                                                          General Information
  1914.                                                              Start Up System
  1915.  
  1916.  
  1917.               Floppy Disk     Set the Posting Information Disk name of the
  1918.                               disk to the organization name. Do this at the
  1919.                               Main Menu.
  1920.  
  1921.                               Once you have set up the disk(s) and system,
  1922.                               follow the procedure below to start up the
  1923.                               VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer System.
  1924.  
  1925.          START UP SYSTEM
  1926.  
  1927.                               Note: If you were just using another software
  1928.                                     product on your computer, restart your
  1929.                                     computer system.
  1930.  
  1931.               Hard Disk       Power up system. At C>, type cd tr <Enter>.
  1932.                               Continue from Step 6 under Dual Floppy System.
  1933.  
  1934.               Single Drive    Put DOS Disk in drive A, power up computer
  1935.               System          system. When you see the A>, replace the DOS
  1936.                               disk with your PROGRAM/POSTING INFORMATION
  1937.                               DISK. Continue from Step 6 under Dual Floppy
  1938.                               System.
  1939.  
  1940.               Dual Floppy
  1941.               System:
  1942.  
  1943.                               1.    Place PROGRAM DISK in drive A.
  1944.  
  1945.                               2.    Place POSTING INFORMATION DISK in drive
  1946.                                     B.
  1947.  
  1948.                               3.    Power up computer system.
  1949.  
  1950.                                     (If your computer sets the date and time
  1951.                                     automatically, skip Steps 4 and 5.)
  1952.  
  1953.                               4.    Type: (current date - m/d/y) <Enter>
  1954.  
  1955.                               5.    Type: (current time - h:m:s) <Enter>
  1956.  
  1957.                                     -OR- just press <Enter>.
  1958.  
  1959.                               6.    Type: ct <Enter>
  1960.  
  1961.                                     (Always wait for disk drives to stop.)
  1962.  
  1963.                               7.    The Title Screen and Copyright Notice
  1964.                                     for VIANSOFT(R) is shown on the monitor.
  1965.                                     <Enter>
  1966.  
  1967.  
  1968.  
  1969.                                                                          2-8
  1970.  
  1971.                                                          General Information
  1972.                                                            Close Down System
  1973.  
  1974.  
  1975.                               8.    The MAIN MENU is displayed on the
  1976.                                     monitor screen.
  1977.  
  1978.          CLOSE DOWN SYSTEM
  1979.  
  1980.                               1.    Type: q (for Quit) until you see on the
  1981.                                     monitor screen:
  1982.  
  1983.                                     Dual and Single Floppy Disk System:
  1984.  
  1985.                                     BACK UP POSTING INFORMATION DISK(S)
  1986.                                     USED.
  1987.  
  1988.                                     A>_
  1989.  
  1990.                                     Note: Single Floppy System may not
  1991.                                           display the A> until you replace
  1992.                                           the PROGRAM DISK with the DOS COPY
  1993.                                           disk and press <Enter>.
  1994.  
  1995.                                     Hard Disk System:
  1996.  
  1997.                                     BACK UP THE FOLLOWING DATA AND INDEX
  1998.                                     FILES:
  1999.  
  2000.                                     (list of files are displayed on the
  2001.                                     screen)
  2002.  
  2003.                               2.    Follow procedure found in this General
  2004.                                     Information section under the heading
  2005.                                     BACKUP.
  2006.  
  2007.          BACKUP
  2008.  
  2009.                               It is most important that you follow a set
  2010.                               backup procedure. There are a number of
  2011.                               reasons why information on a disk may not be
  2012.                               usable. If you have a backup, you will not
  2013.                               have to redo all the information.
  2014.  
  2015.                               After each session with VIANSOFT(R), you must
  2016.                               make a backup of all information affected
  2017.                               during the session.
  2018.  
  2019.                               Note: If someone else sets up a backup
  2020.                                     procedure for you, be sure to have them
  2021.                                     explain how to get the backup
  2022.                                     information into your system if you need
  2023.                                     to restore information.
  2024.  
  2025.  
  2026.  
  2027.                                                                          2-9
  2028.  
  2029.                                                          General Information
  2030.                                                                       Backup
  2031.  
  2032.  
  2033.                               Floppy Disk System: Backup procedure begins on
  2034.                               page 2-12.
  2035.  
  2036.             Hard Disk Backup  You should have 3 sets of backup disks:
  2037.             Procedure:
  2038.  
  2039.                               1.    BACKUP 1 #1 through BACKUP 1 #?
  2040.  
  2041.                               2.    BACKUP 2 #1 through BACKUP 2 #?
  2042.  
  2043.                               3.    BACKUP 3 #1 through BACKUP 3 #?
  2044.  
  2045.                               You will need 1, 2 or 3 (or more) disks for
  2046.                               each set of backup disks. The number of disks
  2047.                               needed for each set depends on the size of
  2048.                               your member information files.
  2049.  
  2050.                               The first time you use a disk for the BACKUP
  2051.                               Procedure, it must be blank and formatted (see
  2052.                               FORMAT (page 2-14) in this section).
  2053.  
  2054.                               After the first time the disk is used, it can
  2055.                               be used again in the rotation of backups as
  2056.                               discussed later without reformatting.
  2057.  
  2058.                               At the conclusion of each session, you will
  2059.                               leave VIANSOFT(R) by typing q (for Quit) from
  2060.                               the Main Menu.
  2061.  
  2062.                               A message on the screen will remind you to
  2063.                               backup files displayed on the screen.
  2064.  
  2065.                               Note: You may use any method to back up the
  2066.                                     files your system allows. The following
  2067.                                     procedure is to aid the new hard disk
  2068.                                     user.
  2069.  
  2070.               End of First    Place the disk labeled BACKUP 1 #1 in drive A.
  2071.               Session (Hard
  2072.               Disk)
  2073.  
  2074.                               At the C>, type: backup c:\tr\*.* a: <Enter>
  2075.  
  2076.                               Note: Depending on the version of DOS you are
  2077.                                     using, a warning message may appear on
  2078.                                     the monitor. Press <Enter> after reading
  2079.                                     the message.
  2080.  
  2081.                               If you are asked to put in a second backup
  2082.                               disk, remove the first floppy disk and replace
  2083.                               it with the disk labeled BACKUP 1 #2. Press
  2084.  
  2085.                                                                         2-10
  2086.  
  2087.                                                          General Information
  2088.                                                                       Backup
  2089.  
  2090.  
  2091.                               <Enter>. (Do this until the complete
  2092.                               subdirectory TR is backed up.)
  2093.  
  2094.               End of Second   The backup procedure will be almost the same
  2095.               Session (Hard   as for the end of the first session.
  2096.               Disk)
  2097.  
  2098.                               The only difference is that you will use the
  2099.                               set of backup disks labeled BACKUP 2 #1
  2100.                               through BACKUP 2 #?.
  2101.  
  2102.               End of Third    The backup procedure will be almost the same
  2103.               Session (Hard   as for the end of the first and second
  2104.               Disk)           session.
  2105.  
  2106.                               The only difference is that you will use the
  2107.                               set of backup disks labeled BACKUP 3 #1
  2108.                               through BACKUP 3 #?.
  2109.  
  2110.               End of Fourth   The backup procedure will be exactly the same
  2111.               Session (Hard   as for the end of the first session.
  2112.               Disk)
  2113.  
  2114.                               Use the set of backup disks labeled BACKUP 1
  2115.                               #1 through BACKUP 1 #?.
  2116.  
  2117.                               Continue to rotate backup disk sets in a
  2118.                               similar manner after future sessions.
  2119.                               Remember, you must make backups.
  2120.  
  2121.             Restore Backup    If you used the BACKUP command to back up the
  2122.             Information to    information in your TR subdirectory to a
  2123.             Hard Disk         floppy disk, you will use the RESTORE command
  2124.                               to transfer the information from your floppy
  2125.                               disk backup to the hard disk. (Only follow
  2126.                               this procedure when there has been a problem
  2127.                               with the files on the hard disk - see
  2128.                               Troubleshooting.)
  2129.  
  2130.                               Use your most recent set of backup disks: The
  2131.                               set you used before the problem occurred.
  2132.  
  2133.                               Note: The RESTORE command does not alter or
  2134.                                     erase the information on the floppy
  2135.                                     disk.
  2136.  
  2137.                               Put the disk labeled #1 of your most recent
  2138.                               set of backup disks in drive A.
  2139.  
  2140.                               At the C>, type: restore a: c:\tr\*.* <Enter>
  2141.  
  2142.  
  2143.                                                                         2-11
  2144.  
  2145.                                                          General Information
  2146.                                                                       Backup
  2147.  
  2148.  
  2149.                               Note: Depending on the version of DOS you are
  2150.                                     using, you may be asked to put Backup 1
  2151.                                     in drive A. Press <Enter> after reading
  2152.                                     the message.
  2153.  
  2154.                               Note: If you are asked to put a second backup
  2155.                                     disk in drive A, remove the first floppy
  2156.                                     disk and replace it with the second disk
  2157.                                     of the set.
  2158.  
  2159.                               If you use a different method of copying the
  2160.                               files from the backup to the hard disk, be
  2161.                               careful to copy all the data files correctly
  2162.                               to the hard disk.
  2163.  
  2164.             Floppy Disk       << I M P O R T A N T >>
  2165.             Backup Procedure:
  2166.  
  2167.                               IF YOU MUST RESORT TO YOUR BACKUP, ALWAYS MAKE
  2168.                               A COPY OF THE BACKUP AND USE THE COPY IN THE
  2169.                               SYSTEM.
  2170.  
  2171.                               NEVER USE YOUR BACKUP DISK...
  2172.  
  2173.                               ALWAYS MAKE A COPY OF IT AND USE THE COPY.
  2174.  
  2175.                               IF SOMETHING WERE TO HAPPEN TO THE COPY, YOU
  2176.                               STILL HAVE THE ORIGINAL BACKUP TO MAKE ANOTHER
  2177.                               COPY.
  2178.  
  2179.                               Single and Dual Floppy Disk System: You have 3
  2180.                               disks that will be used to store your posting
  2181.                               information.
  2182.  
  2183.                               1.    Posting Information Disk
  2184.  
  2185.                               2.    Posting Information Disk Backup #1
  2186.  
  2187.                               3.    Posting Information Disk Backup #2
  2188.  
  2189.                               Note: Every time you start up the system, you
  2190.                                     will always use the Posting Information
  2191.                                     Disk, not the backup disk.
  2192.  
  2193.                               At the conclusion of the session, you will
  2194.                               always leave VIANSOFT(R) by typing q (for
  2195.                               Quit) (or <Esc>) from the MAIN MENU.
  2196.  
  2197.  
  2198.  
  2199.  
  2200.  
  2201.                                                                         2-12
  2202.  
  2203.                                                          General Information
  2204.                                                                       Backup
  2205.  
  2206.  
  2207.               Single Floppy:  You must rotate your backup disks. Read the
  2208.                               following (under Dual Floppy Disk) to learn
  2209.                               how to use the two backup disks. You will
  2210.                               follow the instructions found in Appendix F to
  2211.                               do the actual backup. The SOURCE disk is your
  2212.                               PROGRAM DISK. The TARGET disk will be the
  2213.                               appropriate numbered backup disk.
  2214.  
  2215.               Dual Floppy
  2216.               Disk:
  2217.  
  2218.               End of First
  2219.               Session
  2220.  
  2221.                               1.    A message on the screen will remind you
  2222.                                     to
  2223.  
  2224.                                     BACK UP POSTING INFORMATION USED
  2225.  
  2226.                                     A>_
  2227.  
  2228.                               2.    Type: diskcopy b: a: <Enter>
  2229.  
  2230.                                     (Remember, wait until disk drives stop.)
  2231.  
  2232.                               3.    Remove the Program Disk from drive A.
  2233.  
  2234.                               4.    After the first session with
  2235.                                     VIANSOFT(R), you will place the disk
  2236.                                     marked Posting Information Disk Backup
  2237.                                     #1 in drive A. <Enter>
  2238.  
  2239.                                     All information stored on the disk in
  2240.                                     drive B is copied onto the disk in drive
  2241.                                     A.
  2242.  
  2243.                               5.    Copy another? Type: n
  2244.  
  2245.                               6.    Remove the disk from drive A. (This is
  2246.                                     the copy.)
  2247.  
  2248.                               7.    Use a felt-tip marker to put the date on
  2249.                                     the label of the Posting Information
  2250.                                     Disk Backup #1.
  2251.  
  2252.                               8.    Remove the disk from drive B.
  2253.  
  2254.                                     The backup procedure has been completed.
  2255.  
  2256.                               9.    Turn off the power to the system.
  2257.  
  2258.  
  2259.                                                                         2-13
  2260.  
  2261.                                                          General Information
  2262.                                                                       Format
  2263.  
  2264.  
  2265.               End of Second   The backup procedure will be almost the same
  2266.               Session         as for the end of the first session.
  2267.  
  2268.                               For Step 4, you will use the disk marked
  2269.                               Posting Information Disk Backup #2 instead of
  2270.                               #1.
  2271.  
  2272.               End of Third    Follow procedure for the end of first session.
  2273.               Session
  2274.  
  2275.                               You will be making a copy onto the disk marked
  2276.                               Posting Information Disk Backup #1.
  2277.  
  2278.                               The old information from the end of session 1
  2279.                               will be replaced by the information recorded
  2280.                               during session 3.
  2281.  
  2282.               End of Fourth   Follow same procedure for the end of session
  2283.               Session         2.
  2284.  
  2285.                               The information for session 4 will be copied
  2286.                               onto the disk marked Posting Information Disk
  2287.                               Backup #2.
  2288.  
  2289.                               Continue to rotate backups in the sessions
  2290.                               that follow.
  2291.  
  2292.             Monthly Backup    Monthly, make a backup of the posting
  2293.                               information and put it with the other archive
  2294.                               disks. Do this once a month or more frequently
  2295.                               if you feel there is a need.
  2296.  
  2297.                               You do not have to keep these monthly backups
  2298.                               past the end of the year. This is just extra
  2299.                               insurance so that you will not have to redo
  2300.                               the entire disk in case of a disk failure.
  2301.  
  2302.          FORMAT (FORMATTING A FLOPPY DISK)
  2303.  
  2304.                               << C A U T I O N >>
  2305.  
  2306.                               If you format a disk which contains data on
  2307.                               it, you will erase the data on the disk. Be
  2308.                               sure that you format the correct disk. (This
  2309.                               is one reason it is so important to have
  2310.                               backups.)
  2311.  
  2312.                               If your computer system is already on, you
  2313.                               should see the A>_ (Hard Disk: C>_ ) before
  2314.                               you begin the formatting procedure. (Skip
  2315.                               steps 3, 4, and 5.)
  2316.  
  2317.                                                                         2-14
  2318.  
  2319.                                                          General Information
  2320.                                                                       Format
  2321.  
  2322.  
  2323.             Dual Floppy Disk
  2324.  
  2325.                               1.    Place the DOS Copy in drive A.
  2326.  
  2327.                               2.    Place disk to be formatted in drive B.
  2328.  
  2329.                               3.    Power up system.
  2330.  
  2331.                               4.    Type: (current date, if applicable)
  2332.                                     <Enter>
  2333.  
  2334.                               5.    Type: (current time, if applicable)
  2335.                                     <Enter>
  2336.  
  2337.                                     -OR- just press <Enter>.
  2338.  
  2339.                               6.    To format a blank disk to be used as a
  2340.                                     Program Disk:
  2341.  
  2342.                                     Type: format b:/s <Enter>
  2343.  
  2344.                                     -OR-
  2345.  
  2346.                                     To format a blank disk to be used as a
  2347.                                     Posting Information Disk:
  2348.  
  2349.                                     Type:   format b: <Enter>
  2350.  
  2351.                               7.    Be sure the disks are in the correct
  2352.                                     drives, then press <Enter>.
  2353.  
  2354.                               8.    Format another?
  2355.  
  2356.                                     Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No) <Enter>
  2357.  
  2358.             Hard Disk System
  2359.             (to format a
  2360.             floppy disk in
  2361.             drive A):
  2362.  
  2363.                               1.    Power up system.
  2364.  
  2365.                               2.    Place disk to be formatted in drive A.
  2366.  
  2367.                               3.    Type: format a:
  2368.  
  2369.                                     (to format disks to be used to backup
  2370.                                     subdirectory TR using the BACKUP
  2371.                                     command)
  2372.  
  2373.  
  2374.  
  2375.                                                                         2-15
  2376.  
  2377.                                                          General Information
  2378.                                                          Basic Edit Commands
  2379.  
  2380.  
  2381.                                     <<Be sure format a: is displayed on the
  2382.                                     monitor before pressing <Enter>.>>
  2383.  
  2384.                                     <Enter>
  2385.  
  2386.                               4.    Disk to be formatted is in drive A.
  2387.  
  2388.                               5.    When drive A stops, the disk in drive A
  2389.                                     is formatted.
  2390.  
  2391.          BASIC EDIT COMMANDS
  2392.  
  2393.                               Press <Enter> to move the cursor (blinking
  2394.                               underline) from one position to the next.
  2395.  
  2396.                               When the cursor is at the position where you
  2397.                               want to edit, press the <Del> (Delete) key.
  2398.                               This will erase the information on the line.
  2399.  
  2400.                               Type the correct information.
  2401.  
  2402.                               (Backspace will erase the character before the
  2403.                               cursor position.)
  2404.  
  2405.                               The above basic editing procedure is used
  2406.                               throughout the System.
  2407.  
  2408.                               For more advanced edit techniques, refer to
  2409.                               Appendix A.
  2410.  
  2411.  
  2412.  
  2413.  
  2414.  
  2415.  
  2416.  
  2417.  
  2418.  
  2419.  
  2420.  
  2421.  
  2422.  
  2423.  
  2424.  
  2425.  
  2426.  
  2427.  
  2428.  
  2429.  
  2430.  
  2431.  
  2432.  
  2433.                                                                         2-16
  2434.  
  2435.                                                          General Information
  2436.                                     Using a Key Disk With a Hard Disk System
  2437.  
  2438.  
  2439.          USING A KEY DISK WITH A HARD DISK SYSTEM
  2440.  
  2441.                               Using a Key Disk with a hard disk system will
  2442.                               discourage the casual viewing of the income
  2443.                               and expense information in the VIANSOFT(R)
  2444.                               Church Treasurer.
  2445.  
  2446.                               Note: If you require true security protection,
  2447.                                     you should investigate the many security
  2448.                                     programs available designed for the
  2449.                                     specific purpose of protecting data.
  2450.  
  2451.             Setting Up The    Follow the directions for setting up the hard
  2452.             Key Disk System   disk system and progress through the entire
  2453.                               set up as if it were for a straight hard disk
  2454.                               system. Once you have completed the regular
  2455.                               set up, you will then set up the Key Disk.
  2456.  
  2457.                               1.    Label a new disk, KEY DISK.
  2458.  
  2459.                               2.    Place KEY DISK in drive A.
  2460.  
  2461.                               3.    Format the KEY DISK in drive A.
  2462.  
  2463.                                     At the C>,
  2464.  
  2465.                                     Type: format a: <Enter>
  2466.  
  2467.                                     The Key Disk is in drive A, press
  2468.                                     <Enter>.
  2469.  
  2470.                                     After the disk formatting is completed,
  2471.  
  2472.                                     Format another?
  2473.  
  2474.                                     Type: n (for No) <Enter>
  2475.  
  2476.                               4.    At the C>,
  2477.  
  2478.                                     Type: cd tr <Enter>
  2479.  
  2480.                                     You are now in the TR subdirectory which
  2481.                                     contains all of the VIANSOFT(R) Church
  2482.                                     Treasurer program and your church data.
  2483.  
  2484.                                     You will now copy the Treasurer program
  2485.                                     and your church name information onto
  2486.                                     the Key Disk in drive A. The data
  2487.                                     (Income and Expense information) will
  2488.                                     remain on the hard disk.
  2489.  
  2490.  
  2491.                                                                         2-17
  2492.  
  2493.                                                          General Information
  2494.                                                          Non-Monetary Assets
  2495.  
  2496.  
  2497.                               5.    Type: copy ct.* a: <Enter>
  2498.  
  2499.                               6.    Type: copy ctsys*.dat a: <Enter>
  2500.  
  2501.                                     You will now erase the Treasurer program
  2502.                                     from the subdirectory on the hard disk.
  2503.  
  2504.                               7.    Type: erase ct.* <Enter>
  2505.  
  2506.                               8.    Type: erase ctsys*.dat <Enter>
  2507.  
  2508.             Using The Key     Once you have set up the KEY DISK following
  2509.             Disk              the previous instructions, you are ready to
  2510.                               use the Key Disk system when accessing the
  2511.                               church income and expense information.
  2512.  
  2513.                               To access the church income and expense
  2514.                               information, at the C>:
  2515.  
  2516.                               1.    Type: cd tr <Enter>
  2517.  
  2518.                               2.    Place the KEY DISK in drive A.
  2519.  
  2520.                               3.    Type: a: <Enter>
  2521.  
  2522.                               4.    Type: ct <Enter>
  2523.  
  2524.                               The VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer will function
  2525.                               the same as for a hard disk system. The only
  2526.                               difference is that you must put the Key Disk
  2527.                               in drive A to access the church income and
  2528.                               expense information. The computer is reading
  2529.                               the program instructions from drive A instead
  2530.                               of drive C.
  2531.  
  2532.                               We suggest you make a duplicate copy of your
  2533.                               KEY DISK and keep it in a safe place.
  2534.  
  2535.                               Note: To change from a Key Disk system back to
  2536.                                     a straight hard disk system, you need
  2537.                                     only copy the files from the Key Disk to
  2538.                                     the hard disk subdirectory containing
  2539.                                     your church data (TR).
  2540.  
  2541.  
  2542.  
  2543.  
  2544.  
  2545.  
  2546.  
  2547.  
  2548.  
  2549.                                                                         2-18
  2550.  
  2551.                                                          General Information
  2552.                                                          Non-Monetary Assets
  2553.  
  2554.  
  2555.          NON-MONETARY ASSETS
  2556.  
  2557.                               With the flexibility of the VIANSOFT(R) Church
  2558.                               Treasurer you can keep track of non-monetary
  2559.                               assets of the church.
  2560.  
  2561.                               This is one example where the Special
  2562.                               Transaction would be used.
  2563.  
  2564.                               Set up a Bank Account called ASSETS. This is
  2565.                               not an actual Bank Account. It will only be
  2566.                               used to keep track of assets.
  2567.  
  2568.                               Set up a Fund called Assets and a Report
  2569.                               Grouping called Non-monetary.
  2570.  
  2571.                               The Budget Items/Categories under the Report
  2572.                               Grouping Non-monetary will be the names of
  2573.                               your assets.
  2574.  
  2575.                               After an expense has been recorded (using the
  2576.                               ENTER EXPENSE screen) for what will be a major
  2577.                               asset, you would add the amount of the asset
  2578.                               (using the Special Transaction (S+)) to the
  2579.                               appropriate Budget Item/Category in the Asset
  2580.                               Fund. Include a comment describing the
  2581.                               specific non-monetary asset.
  2582.  
  2583.                               To depreciate the asset or when it is sold,
  2584.                               subtract the amount (using the Special
  2585.                               Transaction (S-)) to adjust the amount total
  2586.                               for the appropriate Budget Item/Category.
  2587.  
  2588.  
  2589.  
  2590.  
  2591.  
  2592.  
  2593.  
  2594.  
  2595.  
  2596.  
  2597.  
  2598.  
  2599.  
  2600.  
  2601.  
  2602.  
  2603.  
  2604.  
  2605.  
  2606.  
  2607.                                                                         2-19
  2608.  
  2609.                                                          General Information
  2610.                                                              Troubleshooting
  2611.  
  2612.  
  2613.          TROUBLESHOOTING
  2614.  
  2615.             Data Not          Possible causes:
  2616.             Correctly
  2617.             Displayed
  2618.  
  2619.                               Leaving System without typing q (for Quit) (or
  2620.                               pressing <Esc>) from the Main Menu.
  2621.  
  2622.                               Break in electrical service.
  2623.  
  2624.                               Fluctuation in power.
  2625.  
  2626.                               Changed disk at the wrong time.
  2627.  
  2628.                               Disk damaged.
  2629.  
  2630.                               Track on disk not readable.
  2631.  
  2632.                               If for any reason the data does not appear
  2633.                               correct when displayed on the screen (or if
  2634.                               you know one of the above has happened), you
  2635.                               may try the Repair Index routine found in the
  2636.                               Utilities section of this manual. If the
  2637.                               information is still out of order, you must
  2638.                               make a copy of your most recent backup and
  2639.                               redo the entries from that point.
  2640.  
  2641.                               After a break in electrical service or power
  2642.                               fluctuation occurs, the member information
  2643.                               data may appear to be correct on the screen.
  2644.                               The internal commands linking the data and
  2645.                               program may have been altered. It is wise to
  2646.                               redo from the last backup whenever a power
  2647.                               change occurs while the system is running and
  2648.                               disks are in the drives.
  2649.  
  2650.             Improper Shutdown The VIANSOFT(R) Church Treasurer should always
  2651.                               be exited by typing q (for Quit) from the Main
  2652.                               Menu. If you no not do this, the information
  2653.                               on your Posting Information Disk (or
  2654.                               subdirectory) may not be stored correctly.
  2655.                               VIANSOFT(R) will display a message the next
  2656.                               time you start up the program alerting you to
  2657.                               the situation.
  2658.  
  2659.               Best Solution:
  2660.  
  2661.                               1.    If you have a series of backups, make a
  2662.                                     copy of a backup that would be prior to
  2663.                                     the problem occurring (This would not
  2664.  
  2665.                                                                         2-20
  2666.  
  2667.                                                          General Information
  2668.                                                              Troubleshooting
  2669.  
  2670.  
  2671.                                     necessarily be the most recent backup
  2672.                                     for you may have backed up the problem
  2673.                                     onto your most recent backup. You may
  2674.                                     have to check the directory on the disk
  2675.                                     - consult your DOS manual).
  2676.  
  2677.                               2.    Re-enter the transactions from that
  2678.                                     backup to the current date. (This copy
  2679.                                     of the backup is now your current
  2680.                                     Posting Information. Use this
  2681.                                     information as your Posting Information
  2682.                                     when you make future entries.)
  2683.  
  2684.                               3.    Print the Transactions By Entry Date
  2685.                                     (Journal) report. Include the dates for
  2686.                                     the transactions you just entered.
  2687.  
  2688.                               4.    Compare the report you just printed with
  2689.                                     the previous report(s) for the same
  2690.                                     entries and/or verify the new entries
  2691.                                     made (not included on a previous
  2692.                                     report).
  2693.  
  2694.                               5.    Make a backup of the corrected
  2695.                                     information.
  2696.  
  2697.               If You Do Not
  2698.               Have a Current
  2699.               Backup
  2700.  
  2701.                               1.    Run the Repair option in the Utilities
  2702.                                     Menu.
  2703.  
  2704.                               2.    Print the Transactions By Entry Date
  2705.                                     (Journal) report. Include the last two
  2706.                                     sessions information on the report.
  2707.  
  2708.                               3.    Compare information on the report with
  2709.                                     the information you entered last time to
  2710.                                     see if it is all displayed correctly.
  2711.  
  2712.                               4.    The next time you make a transaction
  2713.                                     entry (income, expense, transfer or
  2714.                                     special) print the Transactions By Entry
  2715.                                     Date (Journal) report from the same
  2716.                                     beginning date in Step 2 to the current
  2717.                                     date.
  2718.  
  2719.                               5.    Compare the printed Journal from Step 2
  2720.                                     to the one in Step 4.
  2721.  
  2722.  
  2723.                                                                         2-21
  2724.  
  2725.                                                          General Information
  2726.                                                              Troubleshooting
  2727.  
  2728.  
  2729.                               If they both display the correct transaction
  2730.                               information, the Posting Information is
  2731.                               correct.
  2732.  
  2733.                               If they both do not display the correct
  2734.                               information, you will not be able to use the
  2735.                               Posting Information.
  2736.  
  2737.                               Reconstruct the Posting Information from the
  2738.                               point of a previous backup (see Best Solution)
  2739.                               or from initial set up.
  2740.  
  2741.                               Be sure to make regular backups of the Posting
  2742.                               Information (See BACKUP in this section of the
  2743.                               manual).
  2744.  
  2745.             Computer Not      Check power switches.
  2746.             Working
  2747.  
  2748.                               Check cables (be sure cable connections are
  2749.                               secure)
  2750.  
  2751.                               Check for correct disk.
  2752.  
  2753.                               Check to see if printer is "on line".
  2754.  
  2755.             Error Messages    It is possible for the computer not to be able
  2756.                               to read a damaged disk.
  2757.  
  2758.                               If you see on the screen:
  2759.  
  2760.                               Turbo Access I/O Error
  2761.  
  2762.                               you should try running the Repair from the
  2763.                               Utilities Menu.
  2764.  
  2765.               Error #243      If this error number appears on your screen,
  2766.                               you may need to have a config.sys file on your
  2767.                               DOS (or Root Directory for hard disk). The
  2768.                               config.sys file may need to have
  2769.  
  2770.                               FILES=20
  2771.  
  2772.                               Consult your DOS manual regarding this file.
  2773.  
  2774.               Error #153      Use the Repair option on the Utilities Menu.
  2775.                               If this does not solve the problem, make a
  2776.                               copy of your most recent backup of the Posting
  2777.                               Information and redo from the last back up.
  2778.  
  2779.  
  2780.  
  2781.                                                                         2-22
  2782.  
  2783.                                                          General Information
  2784.                                                              Troubleshooting
  2785.  
  2786.  
  2787.                               << I M P O R T A N T >>
  2788.  
  2789.                               If you are not able to exit (Quit) the program
  2790.                               through the normal procedure of typing q (for
  2791.                               Quit) from the MAIN MENU, something has
  2792.                               altered the information on the disks. Make a
  2793.                               copy of your most recent POSTING INFORMATION
  2794.                               and PROGRAM DISK and re-enter the data from
  2795.                               the date of this backup to the present date.
  2796.  
  2797.  
  2798.  
  2799.  
  2800.  
  2801.  
  2802.  
  2803.  
  2804.  
  2805.  
  2806.  
  2807.  
  2808.  
  2809.  
  2810.  
  2811.  
  2812.  
  2813.  
  2814.  
  2815.  
  2816.  
  2817.  
  2818.  
  2819.  
  2820.  
  2821.  
  2822.  
  2823.  
  2824.  
  2825.  
  2826.  
  2827.  
  2828.  
  2829.  
  2830.  
  2831.  
  2832.  
  2833.  
  2834.  
  2835.  
  2836.  
  2837.  
  2838.  
  2839.                                                                         2-23
  2840.  
  2841.  
  2842.  
  2843.  
  2844.          BANK ACCOUNT (NOW ________)
  2845.  
  2846.  
  2847.                               To change the Bank Account Code displayed on
  2848.                               the monitor screen:
  2849.  
  2850.                               From the MAIN MENU,
  2851.  
  2852.                               Type: a (for Bank Account)
  2853.  
  2854.                               The CHANGE BANK ACCOUNT screen is displayed.
  2855.  
  2856.                               At the bottom of the screen, F10) Code List
  2857.                               and Bank Account to change to is displayed.
  2858.                               (The current Bank Account Code is displayed.)
  2859.  
  2860.                               Press F10 (Function key 10) to display Bank
  2861.                               Account Codes and Descriptions.
  2862.  
  2863.                               Press F10 again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to return
  2864.                               to the change BANK ACCOUNT screen.
  2865.  
  2866.                               Press Del (Delete) to erase the Bank Account
  2867.                               Code displayed.
  2868.  
  2869.                               Type the Bank Account Code for the Bank
  2870.                               Account you wish to display. <Enter>
  2871.  
  2872.                               The MAIN MENU is displayed on your screen.
  2873.  
  2874.                               The Bank Account (Now ________) displays the
  2875.                               new Bank Account Code. The new Bank Account
  2876.                               Code will also be displayed at the upper right
  2877.                               on other appropriate screens.
  2878.  
  2879.                               You can now enter transactions in this Bank
  2880.                               Account.
  2881.  
  2882.                               Note: When you exit the program and start it
  2883.                                     up again the next time, the default Bank
  2884.                                     Account Code will be displayed on the
  2885.                                     Main Menu. (Refer to page 6-16 for
  2886.                                     details on setting the Default Bank
  2887.                                     Account Code.)
  2888.  
  2889.  
  2890.  
  2891.  
  2892.  
  2893.  
  2894.  
  2895.  
  2896.  
  2897.                                                                          3-1
  2898.  
  2899.  
  2900.  
  2901.  
  2902.          ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU
  2903.  
  2904.  
  2905.                               From the Main Menu,
  2906.  
  2907.                               Type: e (for Enter Transactions Menu)
  2908.  
  2909.                               The ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU is displayed on
  2910.                               the monitor.
  2911.  
  2912.                               From the ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU, you can do
  2913.                               the following:
  2914.  
  2915.                                 . Enter Income (and Income Adjustments)
  2916.                                 . Enter Expenses (and Expense Adjustments)
  2917.                                 . Enter Transfers (from one Bank Account to
  2918.                                   another)
  2919.                                 . Enter Special Transactions
  2920.                                 . Enter Balance Forward Amounts
  2921.                                 . Print the TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE
  2922.                                   (LIST) (Journal of entries made during the
  2923.                                   session)
  2924.                                 . Return to the MAIN MENU
  2925.  
  2926.          ENTER INCOME
  2927.  
  2928.                               Notes on entering income:
  2929.  
  2930.                               All money to be placed into the Bank Account
  2931.                               displayed at the top right of the screen using
  2932.                               the ENTER INCOME screen will be considered
  2933.                               income.
  2934.  
  2935.                               Interest is added to a Bank Account through
  2936.                               the ENTER INCOME screen.
  2937.  
  2938.                               VIANSOFT(R) handles as many as eight item
  2939.                               codes on a single entry screen. If the total
  2940.                               amount of income is to be distributed to more
  2941.                               than eight Fund or Budget Item/Category codes,
  2942.                               divide the total amount into two or more entry
  2943.                               screens for recording and posting purposes.
  2944.                               You would include a comment "Entry 1 of 2" and
  2945.                               "Entry 2 of 2" to indicate how the entries are
  2946.                               related.
  2947.  
  2948.             Procedure         From the ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU,
  2949.  
  2950.                               Type: i (for Income)
  2951.  
  2952.  
  2953.  
  2954.  
  2955.                                                                          4-1
  2956.  
  2957.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  2958.                                                                 Enter Income
  2959.  
  2960.  
  2961.                               The ENTER INCOME MENU is displayed on the
  2962.                               monitor.
  2963.  
  2964.               Bank Account    The Bank Account code is displayed (for the
  2965.                               Bank Account you are presently working in) at
  2966.                               the upper right of the screen. If this is not
  2967.                               the Bank Account you want to enter income to,
  2968.                               you can change the Bank Account code by
  2969.                               choosing the Bank Account (Now _____) option
  2970.                               from the Main Menu.
  2971.  
  2972.                               From the ENTER INCOME MENU,
  2973.  
  2974.                               Press <F2> (Function Key 2) (for Enter Income)
  2975.  
  2976.                               The ENTER INCOME screen is displayed on the
  2977.                               monitor.
  2978.  
  2979.               Posting Date    The Posting Date field displays the current
  2980.                               date.
  2981.  
  2982.                               The cursor (blinking underline) is positioned
  2983.                               in the Posting Date field.
  2984.  
  2985.                               Edit: If you wish to change this date to a
  2986.                                     previous date, press DEL (Delete) to
  2987.                                     erase the date displayed and/or just
  2988.                                     type the date at which you wish this
  2989.                                     ENTER INCOME entry to be posted and
  2990.                                     press <Enter>.
  2991.  
  2992.                               Note: Once you change the posting date, it
  2993.                                     will remain changed for other
  2994.                                     transactions until you change it again
  2995.                                     or leave the ENTER TRANSACTIONS section
  2996.                                     of the program.
  2997.  
  2998.                               Note: If you post to a previous date and
  2999.                                     reports have already been printed, you
  3000.                                     may have to print new reports to
  3001.                                     accurately reflect this posting.
  3002.  
  3003.                               When the correct posting date is displayed on
  3004.                               the monitor, press <Enter>.
  3005.  
  3006.               Total Amount    Type the total amount to be entered into the
  3007.               for this Entry  Bank Account displayed for this ENTER INCOME
  3008.                               screen. <Enter>
  3009.  
  3010.  
  3011.  
  3012.  
  3013.                                                                          4-2
  3014.  
  3015.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3016.                                                                 Enter Income
  3017.  
  3018.  
  3019.                               Note: Do not use decimal point or comma.
  3020.                                     Include dollars and cents.
  3021.                                     Example: for: $6,756.89 type: 675689
  3022.  
  3023.                               Note: If the amount is left at zero, the entry
  3024.                                     will not be recorded or posted. Set the
  3025.                                     Amount field to zero if you want to
  3026.                                     leave the ENTER INCOME screen without
  3027.                                     recording and posting information.
  3028.  
  3029.               Comment         You may include a comment regarding this ENTER
  3030.                               INCOME transaction of up to 30 characters.
  3031.  
  3032.                               Type: (comment) (Optional) <Enter>
  3033.  
  3034.               Funds Or Designated Budget Items/Categories To Add To
  3035.  
  3036.                               You can add income to a Fund or Budget
  3037.                               Item/Category.
  3038.  
  3039.                               Code  The Default Fund Code is displayed. This
  3040.                                     should be for the General Operation Fund
  3041.                                     (the most active fund that the donations
  3042.                                     for General Local Church operations
  3043.                                     (Budgeted Items) would be placed in).
  3044.  
  3045.                               Edit: Edit this Code if you want to record and
  3046.                                     post to a different Fund or Budget
  3047.                                     Item/Category. Press DEL (Delete) to
  3048.                                     erase the code and/or just type correct
  3049.                                     code.
  3050.  
  3051.                               Code List: Press <F10> (Function Key 10) to
  3052.                                     display a list of Fund, Report Group and
  3053.                                     Budget Item/Category Codes. Press <F10>
  3054.                                     again (or <Esc> (Escape) to return to
  3055.                                     the ENTER INCOME screen.
  3056.  
  3057.                               With the correct code displayed, press
  3058.                               <Enter>.
  3059.  
  3060.               Description     The Code Description is displayed to the right
  3061.                               of the Code.
  3062.  
  3063.               T (Type)        The type of Code is displayed (F for Fund, B
  3064.                               for Budget Item/Category).
  3065.  
  3066.               Amount          The amount (same as the Total Amount for this
  3067.                               Entry) is displayed to the right of the Type
  3068.                               (T) for the Fund or Budget Item/Category
  3069.                               selected.
  3070.  
  3071.                                                                          4-3
  3072.  
  3073.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3074.                                                                 Enter Income
  3075.  
  3076.  
  3077.               Recording and Posting Options
  3078.  
  3079.                 Total Amount to Default Fund
  3080.  
  3081.                               The Amount to the right of the Code,
  3082.                               Description and T (Type) is to be recorded and
  3083.                               posted to the Default Fund (General Operation
  3084.                               Fund).
  3085.  
  3086.                               Record And Post Income
  3087.  
  3088.                               To record and post the Total Amount for this
  3089.                               Entry to the Default Fund (General Operation
  3090.                               Fund), press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>).
  3091.  
  3092.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  3093.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  3094.                               keys.)
  3095.  
  3096.                               The entry is recorded and posted.
  3097.  
  3098.                 Total Amount to Default Fund and Other Funds or Budget
  3099.                 Items/Categories
  3100.  
  3101.                               To divide the Total Amount for this Entry
  3102.                               between the Default Fund (General Operation
  3103.                               Fund) and other Funds and/or Budget
  3104.                               Items/Categories:
  3105.  
  3106.                               The Code, Description, Type (T) and Amount
  3107.                               should be displayed for the Default Fund.
  3108.  
  3109.                               The cursor (blinking underline) should be
  3110.                               positioned under the Amount (to the right of
  3111.                               the T (Type)). The Total Amount for this Entry
  3112.                               is displayed.
  3113.  
  3114.                               Edit the amount to the right of the Type (T).
  3115.  
  3116.                               Type the amount to be recorded and posted to
  3117.                               the Default Fund (General Operation Fund).
  3118.                               (Include dollars and cents. Do not use decimal
  3119.                               point or comma.) <Enter>
  3120.  
  3121.                               The cursor (blinking underline) is positioned
  3122.                               under the Code column directly below the code
  3123.                               for the Default Fund (General Operation Fund).
  3124.  
  3125.                               You will type the Code for another Fund or
  3126.                               Budget Item/Category that will receive another
  3127.                               part of the Total Amount for this Entry.
  3128.  
  3129.                                                                          4-4
  3130.  
  3131.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3132.                                                                 Enter Income
  3133.  
  3134.  
  3135.                               Code List: Press <F10> (Function Key 10) to
  3136.                                     display a list of Fund and Budget
  3137.                                     Item/Category Codes on the monitor. (Use
  3138.                                     <PgUp> (Page Up) and <PgDn> (Page Down)
  3139.                                     keys to view more than one code screen.)
  3140.  
  3141.                                     Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  3142.                                     return to the ENTER INCOME screen.
  3143.  
  3144.                               Type the Code for the second Fund or Budget
  3145.                               Item/Category to receive part of the Total
  3146.                               Amount for this Entry (Total Amount For This
  3147.                               Entry is displayed near the top of the
  3148.                               screen.) <Enter>
  3149.  
  3150.                               The Description is automatically displayed for
  3151.                               the second Code number.
  3152.  
  3153.                               The Type (T) is displayed, F for Fund, B for
  3154.                               Budget Item/Category.
  3155.  
  3156.                               The difference between the Total Amount For
  3157.                               This Entry and the amount for the first Code
  3158.                               (General Operation Fund) is automatically
  3159.                               displayed for the second Code in the Amount
  3160.                               field to the right of the Description and Type
  3161.                               (T).
  3162.  
  3163.                               If more Budget Items/Categories or Funds are
  3164.                               to receive money from this same ENTER INCOME
  3165.                               entry, edit the second code amount to the
  3166.                               amount to be recorded and posted for the code
  3167.                               number, then press <Enter>. Type another Code
  3168.                               for a Fund or Budget Item/Category and so on
  3169.                               for a maximum of 8 on this ENTER INCOME
  3170.                               screen.
  3171.  
  3172.                               The computer will monitor this entry to be
  3173.                               sure the Amounts to the right of the
  3174.                               Descriptions equal the Total Amount of the
  3175.                               Entry displayed near the top of the screen.
  3176.  
  3177.                               Edit: Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor
  3178.                                     control) keys to move the cursor to the
  3179.                                     entry needing correction. Press the DEL
  3180.                                     (Delete) key. Type correct entry.
  3181.  
  3182.                               Record And Post Income
  3183.  
  3184.  
  3185.  
  3186.  
  3187.                                                                          4-5
  3188.  
  3189.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3190.                                                                 Enter Income
  3191.  
  3192.  
  3193.                               When the information is correctly displayed on
  3194.                               the monitor, press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) to record
  3195.                               and post the information displayed on the
  3196.                               monitor and return to the ENTER INCOME MENU.
  3197.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  3198.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  3199.                               keys.)
  3200.  
  3201.                 Total Amount to Funds or Budget Items/Categories other than
  3202.                 the Default Fund
  3203.  
  3204.                               To record and post the Total Amount for this
  3205.                               Entry to Funds and/or Budget Items/Categories
  3206.                               not including the Default Fund (General
  3207.                               Operation Fund):
  3208.  
  3209.                               With the Default Fund Code displayed in the
  3210.                               Code column, press the DEL (Delete) key to
  3211.                               erase the code displayed.
  3212.  
  3213.                               Code List: Press <F10> (Function Key 10) to
  3214.                                     display a list of Fund and Budget
  3215.                                     Item/Category Codes on your screen. (Use
  3216.                                     <PgUp> (Page Up) and <PgDn> (Page Down)
  3217.                                     keys to view more than one code screen.)
  3218.  
  3219.                               Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  3220.                               return to the ENTER INCOME screen.
  3221.  
  3222.                               Type the Code of the Fund or Budget
  3223.                               Item/Category you wish to record and post to.
  3224.                               <Enter>
  3225.  
  3226.                               Edit the amount to the right of the Type (T)
  3227.                               if you will not be posting the total amount to
  3228.                               this one Fund or Budget Item/Category.
  3229.  
  3230.                               The cursor position should be under the Amount
  3231.                               (to the right of the T (Type)).
  3232.  
  3233.                               Press the DEL (Delete) key to erase the
  3234.                               amount.
  3235.  
  3236.                               Type amount to be posted to the Fund or Budget
  3237.                               Item/Category. (Include dollars and cents. Do
  3238.                               not use decimal point or comma.) <Enter>
  3239.  
  3240.                               If other Funds or Budget Items/Categories are
  3241.                               to receive money on this ENTER INCOME entry,
  3242.                               edit the second code amount, press <Enter>.
  3243.                               Type another Code for a Fund or Budget
  3244.  
  3245.                                                                          4-6
  3246.  
  3247.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3248.                                                      Enter Income Adjustment
  3249.  
  3250.  
  3251.                               Item/Category and so on for a maximum of 8 on
  3252.                               this ENTER INCOME entry screen.
  3253.  
  3254.                               For each item entered, the difference between
  3255.                               the Total Amount for this Entry and the sum of
  3256.                               the Amounts for the Funds or Budget
  3257.                               Items/Categories is automatically displayed
  3258.                               for the last item code Amount.
  3259.  
  3260.                               Note: For more than 8 items, divide the Total
  3261.                                     Amount to be placed into the Bank
  3262.                                     Account into sections and record and
  3263.                                     post each section separately.
  3264.  
  3265.                               The computer will monitor this entry to be
  3266.                               sure the Amounts to the right of the
  3267.                               Descriptions equal the Total Amount of the
  3268.                               Entry displayed near the top of the screen.
  3269.  
  3270.                               Edit: Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor
  3271.                                     control) keys to move the cursor to the
  3272.                                     entry needing correction. Press the DEL
  3273.                                     (Delete) key. Type correct entry.
  3274.  
  3275.                               Record And Post The Income
  3276.  
  3277.                               When the information is correctly displayed on
  3278.                               the monitor, press Ctrl-q to record and post
  3279.                               the information displayed on the monitor and
  3280.                               display the ENTER INCOME MENU.
  3281.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  3282.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  3283.                               keys.)
  3284.  
  3285.               Quit            Type q (for Quit) to return to the ENTER
  3286.                               TRANSACTIONS MENU.
  3287.  
  3288.          ENTER INCOME ADJUSTMENT
  3289.  
  3290.                               The ENTER INCOME ADJUSTMENT screen is used to
  3291.                               do the following:
  3292.  
  3293.                                 . Make a correction showing any money that
  3294.                                   was entered as income that should not have
  3295.                                   been entered as income
  3296.  
  3297.                                 . Correct an ENTER INCOME entry. Negate an
  3298.                                   income entry that was posted incorrectly
  3299.  
  3300.                                 . Enter amounts of member contribution
  3301.                                   checks returned for lack of funds (bounced
  3302.  
  3303.                                                                          4-7
  3304.  
  3305.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3306.                                                      Enter Income Adjustment
  3307.  
  3308.  
  3309.                                   checks) (the amount of the check was
  3310.                                   originally posted as income, but now the
  3311.                                   church income must be adjusted to show
  3312.                                   that the amount of the returned check is
  3313.                                   not included as income)
  3314.  
  3315.                                 . Remove money from one Fund or Budget
  3316.                                   Item/Category to be placed into another
  3317.                                   Fund or Budget Item/Category. (The income
  3318.                                   will be adjusted out of one Fund or Budget
  3319.                                   Item/Category and entered as income into
  3320.                                   another Fund or Budget Item/Category.)
  3321.  
  3322.                               Note: If you need to reference a previous
  3323.                                     incorrect Income entry, you can print
  3324.                                     the TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE (Journal)
  3325.                                     (List) to the screen or printer.
  3326.  
  3327.                               IMPORTANT: To correct an incorrect income
  3328.                               entry, adjust the TOTAL AMOUNT, then reenter
  3329.                               the full, correct amount using Enter Income.
  3330.  
  3331.             Procedure         From the ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU,
  3332.  
  3333.                               Type: i (for Income)
  3334.  
  3335.                               The ENTER INCOME MENU is displayed on the
  3336.                               monitor.
  3337.  
  3338.                               To access the ENTER INCOME ADJUSTMENT screen,
  3339.  
  3340.                               Press <F3> (Function Key 3)
  3341.  
  3342.                               The ENTER INCOME ADJUSTMENT screen is
  3343.                               displayed on the monitor.
  3344.  
  3345.                               A message is displayed at the bottom of the
  3346.                               screen to remind you that you are in Income
  3347.                               Adjustment.
  3348.  
  3349.                               If you wish to continue, type Y (for Yes).
  3350.  
  3351.                               You will notice that the ENTER INCOME
  3352.                               ADJUSTMENT screen looks almost exactly like
  3353.                               the ENTER INCOME screen.
  3354.  
  3355.               Bank Account    Code at the top right of the screen.
  3356.  
  3357.               Posting Date    Current date is displayed (Can be edited. Type
  3358.                               correct date) <Enter>
  3359.  
  3360.  
  3361.                                                                          4-8
  3362.  
  3363.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3364.                                                      Enter Income Adjustment
  3365.  
  3366.  
  3367.               Amount          Type Total Amount to be taken out of the Funds
  3368.                               or Budget Items/Categories affected. <Enter>
  3369.  
  3370.               Comment         Include a comment that will clarify this
  3371.                               income adjustment. (Example: Correction - last
  3372.                               entry) <Enter>
  3373.  
  3374.               Funds Or Designated Budget Items/Categories Affected
  3375.  
  3376.                               The cursor is positioned under the heading
  3377.                               Code.
  3378.  
  3379.                               Code List: Press <F10> to access the Code List
  3380.                                     for reference.
  3381.  
  3382.                                     Use the <PgUp> (Page Up) and <PgDn>
  3383.                                     (Page Down) keys to view Codes.
  3384.  
  3385.                                     Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  3386.                                     return to the ENTER INCOME ADJUSTMENT
  3387.                                     screen.
  3388.  
  3389.                               Type the Fund or Budget Item/Category Code
  3390.                               affected. <Enter>
  3391.  
  3392.                               The total amount of this Income Adjustment is
  3393.                               automatically displayed to the right of the
  3394.                               Description.
  3395.  
  3396.                               Edit: If the amount for this Income Adjustment
  3397.                                     is to be recorded and posted to more
  3398.                                     than one Fund or Budget Item/Category,
  3399.                                     edit the amount displayed to the right
  3400.                                     of the Description.
  3401.  
  3402.                                     Type in the amount to be adjusted for
  3403.                                     this Fund or Budget Item/Category for
  3404.                                     this Income Adjustment. <Enter>
  3405.  
  3406.                               Note: The computer will make sure the amounts
  3407.                                     to be adjusted for the Funds or Budget
  3408.                                     Items/Categories equal the Amount
  3409.                                     displayed below the Posting Date field.
  3410.  
  3411.                               The cursor (blinking underline) is now
  3412.                               positioned below the first Code. Type the Code
  3413.                               for another Fund or Budget Item/Category that
  3414.                               is affected by this Income Adjustment (if
  3415.                               applicable). <Enter>
  3416.  
  3417.  
  3418.  
  3419.                                                                          4-9
  3420.  
  3421.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3422.                                                      Enter Income Adjustment
  3423.  
  3424.  
  3425.                               The Description is automatically displayed for
  3426.                               the Code Number.
  3427.  
  3428.                               The difference between the Amount displayed
  3429.                               under the Posting Date (near the top of the
  3430.                               screen) and the amount to the right of the
  3431.                               Fund or Budget Item/Category Code Amount is
  3432.                               automatically displayed.
  3433.  
  3434.                               If more Funds or Budget Items/Categories are
  3435.                               to be included in the Income Adjustment, edit
  3436.                               the second Code amount, press <Enter>. Type
  3437.                               another Fund or Budget Item/Category Code,
  3438.                               press <Enter>, and so on for a maximum of 8 on
  3439.                               this ENTER INCOME ADJUSTMENT screen.
  3440.  
  3441.                               Note: For more than 8 items, divide the total
  3442.                                     adjustment amount into two or more
  3443.                                     sections. Use more than one ENTER INCOME
  3444.                                     ADJUSTMENT screen.
  3445.  
  3446.                               Note: If you are correcting an error from the
  3447.                                     previous ENTER INCOME entry, be sure you
  3448.                                     enter the Fund or Budget Item/Category
  3449.                                     codes and amounts the same way you did
  3450.                                     for the ENTER INCOME entry. This
  3451.                                     Adjustment will negate the ENTER INCOME
  3452.                                     entry. Both entries will show on detail
  3453.                                     reports to provide an audit trail.
  3454.  
  3455.                               Edit: Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor
  3456.                                     control) keys to move the cursor to the
  3457.                                     entry needing correction. Press the DEL
  3458.                                     (Delete) key. Type the correct entry.
  3459.  
  3460.               Record and Post When the information is correctly displayed on
  3461.               Income          the monitor, press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) to record
  3462.               Adjustment      and post the information and display the ENTER
  3463.                               TRANSACTIONS MENU.
  3464.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  3465.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  3466.                               keys.)
  3467.  
  3468.                               The ENTER INCOME MENU is displayed on the
  3469.                               monitor.
  3470.  
  3471.               Quit            Type: q (for Quit) (or <Esc>) to return to the
  3472.                               ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU.
  3473.  
  3474.  
  3475.  
  3476.  
  3477.                                                                         4-10
  3478.  
  3479.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3480.                                                               Enter Expenses
  3481.  
  3482.  
  3483.          ENTER EXPENSES
  3484.  
  3485.                               Notes on entering expenses:
  3486.  
  3487.                               Expenses to be recorded and posted to the Bank
  3488.                               Account code displayed at the top right of the
  3489.                               screen will be entered using this menu option.
  3490.  
  3491.                               If the total amount of an expense (for a
  3492.                               single check) is to be deducted from more than
  3493.                               eight Budget Item/Category codes, divide the
  3494.                               total amount into two or more entry screens
  3495.                               for recording and posting purposes. Include a
  3496.                               comment "Entry 1 of 2" and "Entry 2 of 2" to
  3497.                               indicate how the entries are related. The same
  3498.                               check number is used on each entry screen.
  3499.  
  3500.             Procedure         From the ENTER TRANSACTION MENU,
  3501.  
  3502.                               Type: e (for Expenses)
  3503.  
  3504.                               The ENTER EXPENSE MENU screen is displayed on
  3505.                               the monitor.
  3506.  
  3507.               Bank Account    The Bank Account code is displayed for the
  3508.                               Bank Account you are recording and posting to
  3509.                               at the upper right of the ENTER EXPENSE MENU
  3510.                               screen. If this is not the Bank Account you
  3511.                               want to record and post to, return to the MAIN
  3512.                               MENU. There you can change the Bank Account
  3513.                               code by choosing the MAIN MENU option, Bank
  3514.                               Account (Now ________).
  3515.  
  3516.                               Press <F2> (Function Key 2).
  3517.  
  3518.                               The ENTER EXPENSE screen is displayed on the
  3519.                               monitor.
  3520.  
  3521.               Check Number    The next check number for this Bank Account
  3522.                               (checking account) is displayed. (If checks
  3523.                               are not used with this Bank Account, a zero
  3524.                               will be displayed.)
  3525.  
  3526.                               Edit: If the check number is incorrect, press
  3527.                                     the Up Arrow (cursor control) key to
  3528.                                     move the cursor (blinking underline) to
  3529.                                     the Check Number field. Type the correct
  3530.                                     check number. Be sure the correct check
  3531.                                     number is displayed. Press <Enter> to
  3532.                                     move the cursor to the Posting Date
  3533.                                     field after editing.
  3534.  
  3535.                                                                         4-11
  3536.  
  3537.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3538.                                                               Enter Expenses
  3539.  
  3540.  
  3541.               Posting Date    The Posting Date field displays the current
  3542.                               date.
  3543.  
  3544.                               Edit: If you wish to change this date to a
  3545.                                     previous date, type the date you wish
  3546.                                     this ENTER EXPENSE entry to be posted
  3547.                                     to. <Enter>
  3548.  
  3549.               Amount          Type the total amount of this expense for this
  3550.                               Enter Expense screen. <Enter>
  3551.  
  3552.                               Note: If this amount is zero, the ENTER
  3553.                                     EXPENSE entry will not be recorded or
  3554.                                     posted.
  3555.  
  3556.               Payable to      Type the name of the person or business to
  3557.                               whom the money is paid. <Enter>
  3558.  
  3559.               Comment         Type a comment regarding this ENTER EXPENSE
  3560.                               entry of up to 30 characters (optional).
  3561.                               <Enter>
  3562.  
  3563.               Budget Items/Categories To Subtract From
  3564.  
  3565.                               The cursor is positioned under the heading
  3566.                               Code.
  3567.  
  3568.                               Code List: Press <F10> to access the Budget
  3569.                                     Item/Category Code List for reference.
  3570.  
  3571.                               Use the <PgUp> (Page Up) and <PgDn> (Page
  3572.                               Down) keys to view Codes.
  3573.  
  3574.                               Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  3575.                               return to the ENTER EXPENSE screen.
  3576.  
  3577.                               Type the Budget Item/Category Code affected.
  3578.                               <Enter>
  3579.  
  3580.                               The total amount of this expense is
  3581.                               automatically displayed to the right of the
  3582.                               Description.
  3583.  
  3584.                               Note: Only a Budget Item/Category can have an
  3585.                                     expense. A Fund cannot have an expense.
  3586.  
  3587.                               Edit: If the amount for this expense is to be
  3588.                                     recorded and posted to more than one
  3589.                                     Budget Item/Category, edit the amount
  3590.                                     displayed to the right of the
  3591.                                     Description.
  3592.  
  3593.                                                                         4-12
  3594.  
  3595.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3596.                                                               Enter Expenses
  3597.  
  3598.  
  3599.                                     Type in the amount to be subtracted from
  3600.                                     this Budget Item/Category for this
  3601.                                     expense. <Enter>
  3602.  
  3603.                               Note: The computer will make sure the amounts
  3604.                                     to be deducted from the Budget
  3605.                                     Items/Categories equal the Amount
  3606.                                     displayed below the Posting Date.
  3607.  
  3608.                               The cursor (blinking underline) is now
  3609.                               positioned below the first Code. Type the Code
  3610.                               for another Budget Item/Category that part of
  3611.                               the amount will be deducted from for part of
  3612.                               this expense (if applicable). <Enter>
  3613.  
  3614.                               The Description is automatically displayed for
  3615.                               the Code Number.
  3616.  
  3617.                               The difference between the Amount displayed
  3618.                               under the Posting Date (near the top of the
  3619.                               screen) and the amount to the right of the
  3620.                               Budget Item/Category is automatically
  3621.                               displayed.
  3622.  
  3623.                               If more Budget Items/Categories are to be
  3624.                               deducted from for this expense, edit the
  3625.                               second Code amount, press <Enter>. Type
  3626.                               another Budget Item/Category Code, press
  3627.                               <Enter>, and so on for a maximum of 8 on this
  3628.                               ENTER EXPENSE screen.
  3629.  
  3630.                               Note: For more than 8 items, divide the total
  3631.                                     expense amount into two or more
  3632.                                     sections. Use more than one ENTER
  3633.                                     EXPENSE screen to record and post the
  3634.                                     expense to the same Check Number (if
  3635.                                     checking account).
  3636.  
  3637.                               Edit: Use the Up and Down Arrows to move the
  3638.                                     cursor to the field needing correction.
  3639.                                     Type correct information.
  3640.  
  3641.               Record And Post When the information displayed on the monitor
  3642.               The Expense     is correct, press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) to record
  3643.                               and post the expense and display the ENTER
  3644.                               EXPENSE MENU.
  3645.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) Key and press
  3646.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  3647.                               keys.)
  3648.  
  3649.  
  3650.  
  3651.                                                                         4-13
  3652.  
  3653.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3654.                                                     Enter Expense Adjustment
  3655.  
  3656.  
  3657.               Quit            Type q (for Quit) from the ENTER EXPENSE MENU.
  3658.                               The ENTER TRANSACTION MENU is displayed on the
  3659.                               monitor.
  3660.  
  3661.          ENTER EXPENSE ADJUSTMENT
  3662.  
  3663.                               The ENTER EXPENSE ADJUSTMENT is used to do the
  3664.                               following:
  3665.  
  3666.                                 . Make a correction showing any money that
  3667.                                   was entered as an expense that should not
  3668.                                   have been entered as an expense
  3669.  
  3670.                                 . Correct an ENTER EXPENSE entry. Negate an
  3671.                                   expense that was entered incorrectly.
  3672.                                   Correct a mistake.
  3673.  
  3674.                                 . Record and Post Reimbursements
  3675.  
  3676.                                   This is money that was paid out by the
  3677.                                   church which is now being paid back to the
  3678.                                   church. The church paid this expense, but
  3679.                                   is now reimbursed for the amount. It was
  3680.                                   not an expense of the church. (Example:
  3681.                                   Church pays expense for Parsonage phone.
  3682.                                   Pastor reimburses church for personal long
  3683.                                   distance calls.)
  3684.  
  3685.                                 . Record and Post Refunds
  3686.  
  3687.                                   This is money refunded to the church for
  3688.                                   overpayment, etc. This is money that was
  3689.                                   thought to be an expense but has turned
  3690.                                   out to not be an expense. An adjustment is
  3691.                                   made to the expenses to show the refund.
  3692.  
  3693.                                 . Void Checks (church checking account
  3694.                                   checks)
  3695.  
  3696.                                   A check is written to pay an expense. For
  3697.                                   some reason, it had to be voided. It was
  3698.                                   an expense that was not deducted from the
  3699.                                   checking account at the bank. Therefore,
  3700.                                   it had not been an actual expense. An
  3701.                                   adjustment must be made to the expenses
  3702.                                   for this void check.
  3703.  
  3704.                        Note: If you need to reference a previous incorrect
  3705.                              Expense entry, you can print the TRANSACTIONS
  3706.                              BY ENTRY DATE (List) to the screen or printer.
  3707.  
  3708.  
  3709.                                                                         4-14
  3710.  
  3711.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3712.                                                     Enter Expense Adjustment
  3713.  
  3714.  
  3715.                               IMPORTANT: To correct an expense entry, adjust
  3716.                               the TOTAL AMOUNT of the entry, then enter the
  3717.                               full, correct amount using Enter Expense.
  3718.  
  3719.             Procedure         From the ENTER TRANSACTION MENU,
  3720.  
  3721.                               Type: e (for Expenses)
  3722.  
  3723.                               The ENTER EXPENSE MENU screen is displayed on
  3724.                               the monitor.
  3725.  
  3726.                               To access the ENTER EXPENSE ADJUSTMENT screen,
  3727.  
  3728.                               Press <F3> (Function Key 3)
  3729.  
  3730.                               The ENTER EXPENSE ADJUSTMENT screen is
  3731.                               displayed on the monitor.
  3732.  
  3733.                               A message is displayed at the bottom of the
  3734.                               screen as a reminder to where you are in the
  3735.                               program and asking you if you wish to
  3736.                               continue.
  3737.  
  3738.                               If you wish to continue, type Y (for Yes).
  3739.  
  3740.                               You will notice that the ENTER EXPENSE
  3741.                               ADJUSTMENT screen looks like the ENTER EXPENSE
  3742.                               screen.
  3743.  
  3744.               Bank Account    Code at the top right of the screen.
  3745.  
  3746.               Check Number    Type church check number this Expense
  3747.                               Adjustment is for (for Bank Account without
  3748.                               checks, leave at zero) <Enter>
  3749.  
  3750.               Posting Date    Current date displayed. (Edit: Type posting
  3751.                               date) <Enter>
  3752.  
  3753.               Total Amount To Type Total Amount to be Adjusted for this
  3754.               Be Adjusted     ENTER EXPENSE ADJUSTMENT screen. <Enter>
  3755.  
  3756.                               Note: If this amount is zero, the ENTER
  3757.                                     EXPENSE ADJUSTMENT entry will not be
  3758.                                     recorded or posted.
  3759.  
  3760.               Payable to      If a check, type the name of the person or
  3761.                               business the check was payable to (or leave
  3762.                               blank, if not a checking account) <Enter>
  3763.  
  3764.               Comment         Type a comment regarding this expense
  3765.                               adjustment of up to 30 characters. <Enter>
  3766.  
  3767.                                                                         4-15
  3768.  
  3769.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3770.                                                     Enter Expense Adjustment
  3771.  
  3772.  
  3773.               Budget          The cursor is positioned under the heading
  3774.               Items/Categorie Code.
  3775.               s Affected
  3776.  
  3777.                               Code List: Press <F10> to access the Budget
  3778.                                     Item/Category Code List for reference.
  3779.  
  3780.                                     Use the <PgUp> (Page Up) and <PgDn>
  3781.                                     (Page Down) keys to view Codes.
  3782.  
  3783.                                     Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  3784.                                     return to the ENTER EXPENSE ADJUSTMENT
  3785.                                     screen.
  3786.  
  3787.                               Type the Budget Item/Category Code affected.
  3788.                               <Enter>
  3789.  
  3790.                               The total amount of this expense is
  3791.                               automatically displayed to the right of the
  3792.                               Description.
  3793.  
  3794.                               Note: Only a Budget Item/Category can have an
  3795.                                     expense adjustment.
  3796.  
  3797.                               Edit: If the amount for this expense is to be
  3798.                                     recorded and posted to more than one
  3799.                                     Budget Item/Category, edit the amount
  3800.                                     displayed to the right of the
  3801.                                     Description.
  3802.  
  3803.                                     Type in the amount to be adjusted from
  3804.                                     this Budget Item/Category for this
  3805.                                     expense adjustment. <Enter>
  3806.  
  3807.                               Note: The computer will make sure the amounts
  3808.                                     to be deducted from the Budget
  3809.                                     Items/Categories equal the Amount
  3810.                                     displayed below the Posting Date field.
  3811.  
  3812.                               The cursor (blinking underline) is now
  3813.                               positioned below the first Code. Type the Code
  3814.                               for another Budget Item/Category that part of
  3815.                               the amount will be adjusted from for this
  3816.                               expense adjustment (if applicable). <Enter>
  3817.  
  3818.                               The Description is automatically displayed for
  3819.                               the Code Number.
  3820.  
  3821.                               The difference between the Amount displayed
  3822.                               under the Posting Date (near the top of the
  3823.                               screen) and the amount to the right of the
  3824.  
  3825.                                                                         4-16
  3826.  
  3827.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3828.                                                               Enter Transfer
  3829.  
  3830.  
  3831.                               Budget Item/Category is automatically
  3832.                               displayed.
  3833.  
  3834.                               If more Budget Items/Categories are to be
  3835.                               included in this expense adjustment, edit the
  3836.                               second Code amount, press <Enter>. Type
  3837.                               another Budget Item/Category Code, press
  3838.                               <Enter>, and so on for a maximum of 8 on this
  3839.                               ENTER EXPENSE ADJUSTMENT screen.
  3840.  
  3841.                               Note: For more than 8 items, divide the total
  3842.                                     expense adjustment amount into two or
  3843.                                     more sections. Use more than one ENTER
  3844.                                     EXPENSE ADJUSTMENT screen to record and
  3845.                                     post the adjustment to the same Check
  3846.                                     Number (if checking account).
  3847.  
  3848.                               Note: If you are correcting an error from the
  3849.                                     previous ENTER EXPENSE entry, be sure
  3850.                                     you enter the Budget Item/Category codes
  3851.                                     and amounts the same way you did for the
  3852.                                     ENTER EXPENSE entry. This Adjustment
  3853.                                     will negate the ENTER EXPENSE entry.
  3854.                                     Both entries will show on detail reports
  3855.                                     to provide an audit trail.
  3856.  
  3857.                               Edit: You can edit the information displayed
  3858.                                     on the monitor by using the Arrow Keys
  3859.                                     to move the cursor (blinking underline)
  3860.                                     to the field needing correction. Press
  3861.                                     DEL (Delete) to erase the information at
  3862.                                     the cursor position. Type the correct
  3863.                                     information.
  3864.  
  3865.               Record And Post When the information displayed is correct,
  3866.               Expense         press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) to record and post the
  3867.               Adjustment      Expense Adjustment and display the ENTER
  3868.                               EXPENSE MENU on the monitor.
  3869.  
  3870.               Quit            Type q (for Quit) to return to the ENTER
  3871.                               TRANSACTIONS MENU.
  3872.  
  3873.          ENTER TRANSFER (BANK ACCOUNT TO BANK ACCOUNT)
  3874.  
  3875.                               Note: To transfer money from Fund to Fund or
  3876.                                     Budget Item/Category to Budget
  3877.                                     Item/Category refer to Income Adjustment
  3878.                                     in this section of the manual.
  3879.  
  3880.                               If you have more than eight Fund or Budget
  3881.                               Item/Category codes, divide the total amount
  3882.  
  3883.                                                                         4-17
  3884.  
  3885.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3886.                                                               Enter Transfer
  3887.  
  3888.  
  3889.                               of the transfer into two or more entry screens
  3890.                               for recording and posting purposes. You would
  3891.                               include a comment "Entry 1 of 2" and "Entry 2
  3892.                               of 2" to indicate how the entries are related.
  3893.                               (The same check number would be used on each
  3894.                               entry screen if transfer is from a checking
  3895.                               account.)
  3896.  
  3897.                               This option is used to transfer money from one
  3898.                               Bank Account to another Bank Account.
  3899.  
  3900.             Procedure         From the ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU,
  3901.  
  3902.                               Type: t (for Transfer)
  3903.  
  3904.                               The ENTER TRANSFER MENU is displayed on the
  3905.                               monitor.
  3906.  
  3907.                               To display the ENTER TRANSFER OF MONEY BETWEEN
  3908.                               BANK ACCOUNTS screen,
  3909.  
  3910.                               Press <F2> (Function Key 2)
  3911.  
  3912.                               The ENTER TRANSFER OF MONEY BETWEEN BANK
  3913.                               ACCOUNTS screen is displayed on the monitor.
  3914.  
  3915.               Posting Date    The current date is displayed. (Edit: Type the
  3916.                               correct Posting Date) <Enter>
  3917.  
  3918.               Bank Account To The current Bank Account Code is displayed in
  3919.               Transfer FROM   the field.
  3920.  
  3921.                               Edit: Type the code for the Bank Account you
  3922.                                     want to transfer money FROM.
  3923.  
  3924.                               Code List: Press <F10> to display the Bank
  3925.                                     Account Code List on your screen.
  3926.  
  3927.                               Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  3928.                               return to the ENTER TRANSFER OF MONEY BETWEEN
  3929.                               BANK ACCOUNTS screen.
  3930.  
  3931.                               When correct Bank Account Code is displayed on
  3932.                               the monitor, press <Enter>.
  3933.  
  3934.               Total Amount Of Type the total amount to be transferred (Do
  3935.               This Transfer   not use a decimal point. Include dollars and
  3936.                               cents.) <Enter>
  3937.  
  3938.                               Note: If the Amount is zero, the transfer will
  3939.                                     not be recorded.
  3940.  
  3941.                                                                         4-18
  3942.  
  3943.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  3944.                                                               Enter Transfer
  3945.  
  3946.  
  3947.               Check Number    Type church check number (if transfer FROM is
  3948.                               a church checking account, then next check
  3949.                               number for that account is displayed). <Enter>
  3950.  
  3951.               Bank Account To Type Bank Account Code of the Bank Account to
  3952.               Transfer TO     transfer the money TO.
  3953.  
  3954.                               The current Bank Account Code is displayed.
  3955.                               <Enter>
  3956.  
  3957.                               Code List: Press <F10> to display Bank Account
  3958.                                     Code list.
  3959.  
  3960.                                     Press <F10> (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  3961.                                     return to the ENTER TRANSFER OF MONEY
  3962.                                     BETWEEN BANK ACCOUNTS screen.
  3963.  
  3964.               Comment         Type comment regarding this transfer. <Enter>
  3965.  
  3966.               Funds or Budget What Funds or individual Budget
  3967.               Items/Categorie Items/Categories will this transfer of money
  3968.               s Affected      between bank accounts affect?
  3969.  
  3970.                               The cursor is positioned in the Code field.
  3971.  
  3972.               Code            Type the Fund or Budget Item/Category Code the
  3973.                               transfer will be recorded and posted to. (The
  3974.                               Default Fund Code is displayed.)
  3975.  
  3976.                               Example:
  3977.  
  3978.                               You transfer $100.00 from the Savings Account
  3979.                               to the Checking Account. You want $50.00 to be
  3980.                               transferred for the Building Fund (from
  3981.                               Savings to Checking) and $50.00 to be
  3982.                               transferred for the Organ Fund (Savings to
  3983.                               Checking).
  3984.  
  3985.                               Edit the Code if necessary. Type correct Code.
  3986.  
  3987.                               Code List: Press <F10> to display Fund, Report
  3988.                                     Grouping and Budget Item/Category Codes.
  3989.                                     (Use <PgUp> and <PgDn> keys to view
  3990.                                     complete code list.)
  3991.  
  3992.                                     Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  3993.                                     return to the ENTER TRANSFER OF MONEY
  3994.                                     BETWEEN BANK ACCOUNTS screen.
  3995.  
  3996.                               When the correct Code is displayed on the
  3997.                               screen, press <Enter>.
  3998.  
  3999.                                                                         4-19
  4000.  
  4001.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  4002.                                                    Enter Special Transaction
  4003.  
  4004.  
  4005.                               The Description, Type (T) and Amount of the
  4006.                               Transfer is automatically displayed to the
  4007.                               right of the Code.
  4008.  
  4009.                               Note: The Type (T) indicates B (for Budget
  4010.                                     Item/Category) or F (for Fund).
  4011.  
  4012.                               The cursor (blinking underline) is positioned
  4013.                               in the Amount field to the right of the
  4014.                               Description and the Type (T).
  4015.  
  4016.                               If the transfer involves more than the one
  4017.                               Budget Item/Category or Fund, edit the Amount.
  4018.  
  4019.                               Edit: Press the DEL (Delete) key to erase the
  4020.                                     amount displayed and/or type the correct
  4021.                                     amount for this transfer (for this
  4022.                                     Budget Item/Category or Fund). <Enter>
  4023.  
  4024.                               Type the second Fund or Budget Item/Category
  4025.                               Code involved in this transfer (if
  4026.                               applicable). <Enter>
  4027.  
  4028.                               The computer will monitor the Amounts for the
  4029.                               Funds and/or Budget Items/Categories affected
  4030.                               so they equal the Total Amount of This
  4031.                               Transfer.
  4032.  
  4033.                               Note: For more than 8 items, you would divide
  4034.                                     the transfer into two or more sections.
  4035.  
  4036.                               Edit: Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor
  4037.                                     control) keys to move the cursor to the
  4038.                                     entry needing correction. Press the DEL
  4039.                                     (Delete) key. Type the correct entry.
  4040.  
  4041.               Record and Post When the information is displayed correctly on
  4042.               Transfer of     the monitor, press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) to record
  4043.               Money Between   and post the Transfer and display the ENTER
  4044.               Bank Accounts   TRANSFER MENU. (Hold down the Ctrl (Control)
  4045.                               key and press the letter q key, then quickly
  4046.                               release both keys.)
  4047.  
  4048.               Quit            Type q (for Quit) (or <Esc>) to return to the
  4049.                               ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU screen.
  4050.  
  4051.          ENTER SPECIAL TRANSACTION
  4052.  
  4053.                               The Special Transaction option is included to
  4054.                               give VIANSOFT(R) the flexibility of
  4055.  
  4056.  
  4057.                                                                         4-20
  4058.  
  4059.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  4060.                                                    Enter Special Transaction
  4061.  
  4062.  
  4063.                               Transaction Entry for individual church
  4064.                               accounting applications.
  4065.  
  4066.                               This Special Transaction option will be used
  4067.                               whenever you want to enter transactions that
  4068.                               should not be considered income or expenses.
  4069.  
  4070.                               The ENTER SPECIAL TRANSACTION is included for
  4071.                               special needs of individual congregations.
  4072.  
  4073.                               Under most situations, you will be able to
  4074.                               record and post Income and Expenses using the
  4075.                               Income and Expenses options on the ENTER
  4076.                               TRANSACTIONS MENU.
  4077.  
  4078.                               Any entries made using the ENTER SPECIAL
  4079.                               TRANSACTION screen will not be included on
  4080.                               reports as income or expenses. The Special
  4081.                               Transaction will appear in a separate section
  4082.                               on certain reports or on a separate report
  4083.                               (All entries will appear on the Journal).
  4084.  
  4085.                               Using the ENTER SPECIAL TRANSACTION screen,
  4086.                               you will be able to Add or Subtract money from
  4087.                               a Fund or Budget Item/Category within a Bank
  4088.                               Account.
  4089.  
  4090.                               If the total amount of a Special Transaction
  4091.                               is to include more than eight Fund or Budget
  4092.                               Item/Category codes, divide the total amount
  4093.                               of the Special into two or more entry screens
  4094.                               for recording and posting purposes. You would
  4095.                               include a comment "Entry 1 of 2" and "Entry 2
  4096.                               of 2" to indicate how the entries are related.
  4097.  
  4098.             Procedure         From the ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU,
  4099.  
  4100.                               Type: s (for Special)
  4101.  
  4102.                               The SPECIAL ENTRY MENU screen is displayed on
  4103.                               the monitor.
  4104.  
  4105.                               A warning is displayed at the bottom of the
  4106.                               screen that Special Entries will not be
  4107.                               included on reports of income or expenses.
  4108.  
  4109.                               At the SPECIAL ENTRY MENU,
  4110.  
  4111.                               Press <F2> (Function Key 2)
  4112.  
  4113.  
  4114.  
  4115.                                                                         4-21
  4116.  
  4117.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  4118.                                                    Enter Special Transaction
  4119.  
  4120.  
  4121.               Bank Account    The Bank Account Code is displayed for the
  4122.                               Bank Account you are entering the Special
  4123.                               Transaction to at the upper right of the ENTER
  4124.                               SPECIAL TRANSACTION screen.
  4125.  
  4126.               Posting Date    The current date is displayed.
  4127.  
  4128.                               Edit: If you wish to change this date to a
  4129.                                     previous date, type the date you wish
  4130.                                     this ENTER SPECIAL TRANSACTION entry to
  4131.                                     be posted to. <Enter>
  4132.  
  4133.               Amount          Type the total amount for this ENTER SPECIAL
  4134.                               TRANSACTION entry. (Do not use decimal point.
  4135.                               Include dollars and cents.) <Enter>
  4136.  
  4137.                               Note: If the amount is zero, the ENTER SPECIAL
  4138.                                     TRANSACTION will not be recorded.
  4139.  
  4140.               Add To Or Subtract From Bank Account Balance
  4141.  
  4142.                               You can add or subtract an amount from the
  4143.                               Bank Account balance.
  4144.  
  4145.                               To add, press a (for Add) <Enter>.
  4146.  
  4147.                                   -OR-
  4148.  
  4149.                               To subtract, type s (for Subtract) <Enter>
  4150.  
  4151.               Comment         Type a comment regarding this ENTER SPECIAL
  4152.                               TRANSACTION entry of up to 30 characters.
  4153.                               <Enter>
  4154.  
  4155.             Funds or Budget Items/Categories Affected
  4156.  
  4157.                               The cursor is positioned at the Code field.
  4158.  
  4159.                               Code List: Press <F10> to display the Budget
  4160.                                     Item/Category and Fund Code List for
  4161.                                     reference.
  4162.  
  4163.                                     (Use <PgUp> and <PgDn> keys to view the
  4164.                                     complete Code List.)
  4165.  
  4166.                                     Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  4167.                                     return to the ENTER SPECIAL TRANSACTION
  4168.                                     screen.
  4169.  
  4170.                               Type the Budget Item/Category or Fund Code
  4171.                               affected. <Enter>
  4172.  
  4173.                                                                         4-22
  4174.  
  4175.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  4176.                                                        Enter Balance Forward
  4177.  
  4178.  
  4179.                               The Description, Type (T) and Amount is
  4180.                               automatically displayed on the screen.
  4181.  
  4182.                               The Amount to the right of the Description and
  4183.                               Type (T) is the same as the Total Amount shown
  4184.                               near the top of the screen.
  4185.  
  4186.                               Edit the amount to the right of the Type (T)
  4187.                               if there is more than one Fund or Budget
  4188.                               Item/Category affected.
  4189.  
  4190.                               Press the DEL (Delete) key to erase the amount
  4191.                               displayed and/or type the correct amount.
  4192.                               <Enter>
  4193.  
  4194.                               Type a second Budget Item/Category or Fund
  4195.                               Code affected (if applicable). <Enter>
  4196.  
  4197.                               The difference between the Amount shown at the
  4198.                               top of the screen and the Amount shown for the
  4199.                               first Budget Item/Category is displayed for
  4200.                               the second Budget Item/Category Amount.
  4201.  
  4202.                               The computer will monitor the entries to be
  4203.                               sure the Amounts to the right of the
  4204.                               Descriptions equal the Total Amount of the
  4205.                               entry displayed at the top of the screen.
  4206.  
  4207.                               Note: For more than 8 items, divide the entry
  4208.                                     into two or more sections using two or
  4209.                                     more ENTER SPECIAL TRANSACTION screens.
  4210.  
  4211.                               Edit: Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor
  4212.                                     control) keys to move the cursor to the
  4213.                                     entry needing correction. Press the DEL
  4214.                                     (Delete) key. Type the correct entry.
  4215.  
  4216.               Record And Post When the information displayed on the screen
  4217.               SPECIAL         is correct, press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) to record
  4218.               TRANSACTION     the SPECIAL TRANSACTION and display the
  4219.                               SPECIAL ENTRY MENU. (Hold down the Ctrl
  4220.                               (Control) key and press the letter q key, then
  4221.                               quickly release both keys.)
  4222.  
  4223.               Quit            Type q (for Quit) (or <Esc>) to return to the
  4224.                               ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU.
  4225.  
  4226.          ENTER BALANCE FORWARD
  4227.  
  4228.                               The Balance Forward option is used to do the
  4229.                               following:
  4230.  
  4231.                                                                         4-23
  4232.  
  4233.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  4234.                                                        Enter Balance Forward
  4235.  
  4236.  
  4237.                                 . Enter amounts of money into Funds or
  4238.                                   Designated Budget Items/Categories (for
  4239.                                   each Bank Account) during the initial set
  4240.                                   up of the program.
  4241.  
  4242.                                 . Enter amounts of money into Funds or
  4243.                                   Designated Budget Items/Categories (in
  4244.                                   each Bank Account) once the Bank Account
  4245.                                   statements have arrived for the last month
  4246.                                   of the previous year (See Year End
  4247.                                   Routine).
  4248.  
  4249.                               The transaction will be labeled Balance
  4250.                               Forward (BF) and will be displayed on
  4251.                               appropriate reports.
  4252.  
  4253.                               IMPORTANT: To set up a new Posting Information
  4254.                               Disk (floppy data disk system), see New Disk
  4255.                               option in the Utilities Menu. To set up your
  4256.                               Posting Information (Disk or Subdirectory) for
  4257.                               the new year, see the Year End Procedure in
  4258.                               the General Information section of this
  4259.                               manual.
  4260.  
  4261.                               If the total amount of a Balance Forward entry
  4262.                               is to include more than eight Fund or Budget
  4263.                               Item/Category codes, divide the total amount
  4264.                               into two or more entry screens for recording
  4265.                               and posting purposes.
  4266.  
  4267.             Procedure         From the ENTER TRANSACTIONS MENU,
  4268.  
  4269.                               Type: b (for Balance Forward)
  4270.  
  4271.                               The Balance Forward Entry Menu is displayed on
  4272.                               the monitor.
  4273.  
  4274.                               Press <F2> (Function Key 2) to display the
  4275.                               ENTER BALANCE FORWARD screen.
  4276.  
  4277.               Posting Date    The current date is displayed.
  4278.  
  4279.                               Edit: If you wish to change this date to a
  4280.                                     previous date, type the date you wish
  4281.                                     this Balance Forward entry to be posted
  4282.                                     to. <Enter>
  4283.  
  4284.               Amount          Type the total amount for this BALANCE FORWARD
  4285.                               entry. (Do not use decimal point. Include
  4286.                               dollars and cents.) <Enter>
  4287.  
  4288.  
  4289.                                                                         4-24
  4290.  
  4291.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  4292.                                                        Enter Balance Forward
  4293.  
  4294.  
  4295.                               Note: If the amount is zero, the entry will
  4296.                                     not be recorded.
  4297.  
  4298.               Balance Forward You can add or subtract Balance Forward
  4299.               Add To or       amounts for a Fund or Budget Item/Category.
  4300.               Subtract From   (Subtraction allows you to correct an error.)
  4301.  
  4302.                               The letter A (for Add) is displayed.
  4303.  
  4304.                               To add, press a (for Add) <Enter>.
  4305.  
  4306.                                   -OR-
  4307.  
  4308.                               To subtract, type s (for Subtract) <Enter>
  4309.  
  4310.               Comment         Type a comment of up to 30 characters
  4311.                               regarding this Balance Forward entry. <Enter>
  4312.  
  4313.               Funds Or Budget Items/Categories Affected
  4314.  
  4315.                               The cursor is positioned in the Code field.
  4316.  
  4317.                               Code List: Press <F10> to display the Fund,
  4318.                                     Report Grouping and Budget Item/Category
  4319.                                     Code List for reference.
  4320.  
  4321.                                     (Use <PgUp> and <PgDn> keys to view the
  4322.                                     complete Code List.)
  4323.  
  4324.                                     Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  4325.                                     return to the ENTER BALANCE FORWARD
  4326.                                     screen.
  4327.  
  4328.                               Type the Fund or Budget Item/Category Code
  4329.                               affected. <Enter>
  4330.  
  4331.                               The Description, Type (T) and Amount are
  4332.                               automatically displayed on the monitor.
  4333.  
  4334.                               The Amount to the right of the Description and
  4335.                               Type (T) is the same as the Amount shown near
  4336.                               the top of the screen.
  4337.  
  4338.                               Edit the amount to the right of the Type (T)
  4339.                               if there is more than one Fund or Budget
  4340.                               Item/Category affected.
  4341.  
  4342.                               Edit: Type the correct amount.
  4343.  
  4344.                               With the correct amount displayed, press
  4345.                               <Enter>.
  4346.  
  4347.                                                                         4-25
  4348.  
  4349.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  4350.                                         Transactions By Entry Date (Journal)
  4351.  
  4352.  
  4353.                               Type other Fund or Budget Item/Category codes
  4354.                               affected (if applicable).
  4355.  
  4356.                               Note: The difference between the Amount shown
  4357.                                     at the top of the screen and the Amount
  4358.                                     for the first Fund or Budget
  4359.                                     Item/Category is displayed for the
  4360.                                     second Fund or Budget Item/Category
  4361.                                     Amount.
  4362.  
  4363.                               The computer will monitor the entries to be
  4364.                               sure the Amounts to the right of the
  4365.                               Descriptions equal the Amount displayed at the
  4366.                               top of the screen. The system will not allow
  4367.                               you to record and post the entry information
  4368.                               until the Amounts are equal.
  4369.  
  4370.                               Note: For more than 8 Funds or Budget
  4371.                                     Items/Categories, divide the entry into
  4372.                                     two or more sections using two or more
  4373.                                     Enter Balance Forward screens.
  4374.  
  4375.                               Edit: Use Up and Down Arrow (cursor control)
  4376.                                     keys to move the cursor to the
  4377.                                     information needing correction. Press
  4378.                                     the DEL (Delete) key. Type the correct
  4379.                                     information.
  4380.  
  4381.               Record And Post When the information is displayed on the
  4382.               Balance Forward screen correctly, press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) to
  4383.                               post and record the BALANCE FORWARD entry and
  4384.                               display the BALANCE FORWARD ENTRY MENU.
  4385.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  4386.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  4387.                               keys.)
  4388.  
  4389.               Quit            Type q (for Quit) to return to the ENTER
  4390.                               TRANSACTIONS MENU.
  4391.  
  4392.          TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE (JOURNAL)
  4393.  
  4394.                               The TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE report should
  4395.                               be printed:
  4396.  
  4397.                                 . At the end of the session, for all Bank
  4398.                                   Accounts you have posted to (Journal)
  4399.  
  4400.                                 . To verify entries made between two dates
  4401.  
  4402.                                 . To display an incorrect entry's
  4403.                                   information so that you will be able to
  4404.  
  4405.                                                                         4-26
  4406.  
  4407.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  4408.                                         Transactions By Entry Date (Journal)
  4409.  
  4410.  
  4411.                                   make an adjustment (you can print to the
  4412.                                   screen or printer for reference)
  4413.  
  4414.                                 . To provide information regarding the
  4415.                                   entries to determine errors when proving
  4416.                                   the Bank Account statement
  4417.  
  4418.                                 . To show an audit trail of entries made
  4419.                                   over specified dates
  4420.  
  4421.                               You will be able to print the report for other
  4422.                               Bank Accounts without changing the Bank
  4423.                               Account Code at the Main Menu. You will
  4424.                               indicate other Bank Account Codes after the
  4425.                               report for each Bank Account is printed.
  4426.  
  4427.             Procedure         From the ENTRY MENU,
  4428.  
  4429.                               Type: l (letter L) (for List)
  4430.  
  4431.               Entry Dates     First Date to be Included:
  4432.  
  4433.                               The current date is displayed.
  4434.  
  4435.                               If the report is to be printed for the current
  4436.                               date displayed, just press <Enter>.
  4437.  
  4438.                               Edit: You can specify the first Entry date to
  4439.                                     be included on the report. Type in the
  4440.                                     date you want this report to begin with,
  4441.                                     then press <Enter>.
  4442.  
  4443.                               Last Date to be Included:
  4444.  
  4445.                               If the last date to be included on the report
  4446.                               is the current date, just press <Enter>.
  4447.  
  4448.                               Edit: You can specify the last Entry date to
  4449.                                     be included on the report. Type in the
  4450.                                     date you want this report to end with,
  4451.                                     then press <Enter>.
  4452.  
  4453.                               Floppy Disk:
  4454.  
  4455.                               Run the report for dates recorded on the disk.
  4456.                               The report cannot span disks.
  4457.  
  4458.                               If the first date is not found on the Posting
  4459.                               Information Disk in your designated data
  4460.                               drive, a message is displayed with the first
  4461.                               date on the disk.
  4462.  
  4463.                                                                         4-27
  4464.  
  4465.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  4466.                                         Transactions By Entry Date (Journal)
  4467.  
  4468.  
  4469.                               For multiple disks, run the report for each
  4470.                               disk.
  4471.  
  4472.                               Hard Disk:
  4473.  
  4474.                               You will not be able to span the report over
  4475.                               multiple subdirectories.
  4476.  
  4477.               Output To       Type: p (for Printer), s (for Screen) or q
  4478.                               (for Quit)
  4479.  
  4480.                               If p (for Printer),
  4481.  
  4482.                               Position paper, then turn on printer. <Enter>
  4483.  
  4484.                               Report being generated.
  4485.  
  4486.                               If s (for Screen), the TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY
  4487.                               DATE report is printed on the screen. (Type c
  4488.                               (for Continue) to display the next page or
  4489.                               type q (for Quit).
  4490.  
  4491.                               Note: If you end a report before it is
  4492.                                     complete a message is displayed alerting
  4493.                                     you that the report is incomplete.
  4494.  
  4495.                               Report complete. <Enter>
  4496.  
  4497.                               Do you want to print report for another Bank
  4498.                               Account?
  4499.  
  4500.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No)
  4501.  
  4502.                               If y (for Yes), type Bank Account Code for
  4503.                               report.
  4504.  
  4505.                               Code List: Press <F10> to display list of Bank
  4506.                                     Account Codes and descriptions. (Press
  4507.                                     <F10> again to return to change the Bank
  4508.                                     Account.)
  4509.  
  4510.                               Type Bank Account Code. <Enter>
  4511.  
  4512.                               Note: The report for the second Bank Account
  4513.                                     will be generated using the same dates
  4514.                                     and Output To as the first report.
  4515.  
  4516.                               You should print the report for all Bank
  4517.                               Accounts with activity during the session by
  4518.                               repeating the steps outlined previously.
  4519.  
  4520.  
  4521.                                                                         4-28
  4522.  
  4523.                                                      Enter Transactions Menu
  4524.                                                                         Quit
  4525.  
  4526.  
  4527.               Report          The following information is included on the
  4528.               Description     TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE (Journal) report:
  4529.  
  4530.                                 . Date of the Report
  4531.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  4532.                                 . Report Period Beginning (Date)
  4533.                                 . Report Period Ending (Date)
  4534.  
  4535.                               The following information is listed for each
  4536.                               Entry Date listed on the report:
  4537.  
  4538.                                 . Posting Date
  4539.                                 . Transaction Type
  4540.                                   Transaction Type (T) Codes
  4541.                                        I    Income
  4542.                                        IA   Income Adjustment
  4543.                                        E    Expense
  4544.                                        EA   Expense Adjustment
  4545.                                        TI   Transfer In
  4546.                                        TO   Transfer Out
  4547.                                        S+   Special Transaction (Add)
  4548.                                        S-   Special Transaction (Subtract)
  4549.                                        BF   Balance Forward
  4550.                                 . Item Code
  4551.                                 . Check Number (if applicable)
  4552.                                 . Item Amount (each amount within an entry)
  4553.                                 . Entry Total (Total Amount for the entry)
  4554.                                 . Description/Pay To/Comment
  4555.                                 . Totals for Bal Fwd, Expense (sum of E &
  4556.                                   EA), Income (sum of I & IA), Special (sum
  4557.                                   of), Transfer (sum of)
  4558.                                 . Beginning Balance (for beginning of
  4559.                                   report)
  4560.                                 . Total for Report Period (the sum of the
  4561.                                   transaction for the report (+ and -))
  4562.                                 . Ending Balance (at the end of the report
  4563.                                   period)
  4564.  
  4565.          QUIT
  4566.  
  4567.                               To return to the MAIN MENU from the ENTER
  4568.                               TRANSACTIONS MENU,
  4569.  
  4570.                               Type: q (for Quit)
  4571.  
  4572.                               The MAIN MENU is displayed on the monitor.
  4573.  
  4574.                               IMPORTANT: To EXIT (Quit) the VIANSOFT(R)
  4575.                               Church Treasurer and to update your records on
  4576.                               the computer, you must type q (for Quit) from
  4577.                               the MAIN MENU.
  4578.  
  4579.                                                                         4-29
  4580.  
  4581.  
  4582.  
  4583.  
  4584.          REPORTS MENU
  4585.  
  4586.  
  4587.                               From the REPORTS MENU, you can print the
  4588.                               following (on the screen or to the printer):
  4589.  
  4590.                                 . Transaction Reports
  4591.                                 . Expense Reports
  4592.                                 . Income Report
  4593.                                 . Adjustment Report
  4594.                                 . Transfer Report
  4595.                                 . Special Transactions Report
  4596.                                 . Budget vs Expenses Report
  4597.                                 . Income vs Expenses Report
  4598.                                 . Location Of Funds Report
  4599.                                 . Bank Account Reports
  4600.                                 . Code Lists
  4601.  
  4602.                               Note: An amount displayed in parentheses on a
  4603.                                     report is deducted from the Bank
  4604.                                     Account.
  4605.  
  4606.                               To access the REPORTS MENU from the MAIN MENU,
  4607.  
  4608.                               Type: r (for Reports).
  4609.  
  4610.          RUNNING A REPORT
  4611.  
  4612.             Before the Report After you select your report from the menu,
  4613.             is Printed        one or more of the following questions will
  4614.                               appear on the screen.
  4615.  
  4616.               Posting Dates   Type the first date to be included on the
  4617.                               report (current date or first date from
  4618.                               previously printed report is displayed).
  4619.                               <Enter>
  4620.  
  4621.                               Type last date to be included on the report
  4622.                               (current date or last date from previously
  4623.                               printed report is displayed). <Enter>
  4624.  
  4625.               Predefined      (This is only displayed if a report filter has
  4626.               Report Filter   previously been saved)
  4627.  
  4628.                               Type number of predefined filter or press
  4629.                               <Enter>.
  4630.  
  4631.                               Note: If you choose a Predefined Report
  4632.                                     Filter, you can edit the filter when it
  4633.                                     is displayed on the screen without
  4634.                                     changing the filter that is saved.
  4635.  
  4636.  
  4637.                                                                          5-1
  4638.  
  4639.                                                                 Reports Menu
  4640.                                                             Running A Report
  4641.  
  4642.  
  4643.               Report Filter   Type a (for ALL) if you wish to include all
  4644.                               Funds, Report Groupings and Budget
  4645.                               Items/Categories on the report.
  4646.  
  4647.                               -OR-
  4648.  
  4649.                               Use the Arrow (cursor control) keys to move
  4650.                               the cursor to the Fund, Report Grouping or
  4651.                               Budget Item/Category you wish to include on
  4652.                               the report.
  4653.  
  4654.                               Type s (for Select) to select the Fund, Report
  4655.                               Grouping or Budget Item/Category (at the
  4656.                               cursor position) to be included on the report.
  4657.                               (Type s (for Select) again to cancel an
  4658.                               individual Fund, Report Grouping or Budget
  4659.                               Item/Category Code previously selected.)
  4660.  
  4661.                               Note: If you select a Fund first, you will
  4662.                                     only be able to select Funds and the
  4663.                                     report will be organized by Fund.
  4664.  
  4665.                                     If you select a Report Grouping first,
  4666.                                     you will be able to select Report
  4667.                                     Groupings and Funds and the report will
  4668.                                     be organized by Report Grouping.
  4669.  
  4670.                                     If you select a Budget Item/Category
  4671.                                     first, you will be able to select any
  4672.                                     combination of Budget Items/Categories,
  4673.                                     Report Groupings or Funds to appear on
  4674.                                     the report and the report will be
  4675.                                     organized by Budget Item/Categories
  4676.                                     within Report Groupings.
  4677.  
  4678.                               Type r (for Reset) to cancel all Fund, Report
  4679.                               Grouping or Budget Items/Categories selected.
  4680.  
  4681.                               Use the <PgDn> (Page Down) and <PgUp> (Page
  4682.                               Up) keys to view other screens of Fund, Report
  4683.                               Grouping or Budget Item/Category Descriptions
  4684.                               and Codes.
  4685.  
  4686.                               When the report filter is set, press <Enter>.
  4687.  
  4688.               Output To       Type: p (for Printer), s (for Screen) or q
  4689.                               (for Quit)
  4690.  
  4691.                               Note: If s (for Screen), the report is
  4692.                                     displayed one screen at a time. (Press c
  4693.  
  4694.  
  4695.                                                                          5-2
  4696.  
  4697.                                                                 Reports Menu
  4698.                                                             Running a Report
  4699.  
  4700.  
  4701.                                     (for Continue) to view the next screen
  4702.                                     on the monitor.)
  4703.  
  4704.                               If p (for Printer),
  4705.  
  4706.                               Position paper, then turn on printer. <Enter>
  4707.  
  4708.             After the Report  Report complete. <Enter>
  4709.             Is Printed
  4710.  
  4711.               Print Report    (Only if you have more than one Bank Account)
  4712.               For Other Bank
  4713.               Accounts
  4714.  
  4715.                               Do you want to print report for another Bank
  4716.                               Account? (Y/N)
  4717.  
  4718.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No).
  4719.  
  4720.                               If y (for Yes), type Bank Account Code to
  4721.                               change to (<F10> for Bank Account Code List).
  4722.  
  4723.                               When correct Bank Account Code is displayed,
  4724.                               press <Enter>.
  4725.  
  4726.                               Note: The dates and Output To for the report
  4727.                                     will be the same as set for the report
  4728.                                     for the previous Bank Account.
  4729.  
  4730.                                     You can print the report for as many
  4731.                                     Bank Accounts as you wish.
  4732.  
  4733.             Save Report       (Only if a Report Filter was used.)
  4734.             Filter
  4735.  
  4736.                               Save Report Filter? (Y/N)
  4737.  
  4738.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No).
  4739.  
  4740.                               If y (for Yes), type the file code number to
  4741.                               save it under.
  4742.  
  4743.                               Type a description of the Report Filter.
  4744.                               <Enter>
  4745.  
  4746.                               Note: You do not have to save the report
  4747.                                     filter again if you saved it before. If
  4748.                                     you changed an existing Predefined
  4749.                                     Report Filter, you can choose not to
  4750.                                     save it, save the new one under a
  4751.                                     different code or overwrite an old code.
  4752.  
  4753.                                                                          5-3
  4754.  
  4755.                                                                 Reports Menu
  4756.                                                         Transactions By Item
  4757.  
  4758.  
  4759.          TRANSACTIONS BY ITEM REPORT
  4760.  
  4761.                               This report shows the Balance Forward, Income,
  4762.                               Expenses, Specials and Transfers for each item
  4763.                               within the dates selected for the report for a
  4764.                               Bank Account.
  4765.  
  4766.                               You can print the TRANSACTIONS BY ITEM report
  4767.                               by any combination of Fund, Report Grouping or
  4768.                               Budget Item/Category.
  4769.  
  4770.                               You can set the beginning and end dates for
  4771.                               the report.
  4772.  
  4773.                               Floppy Disk: The report dates must be
  4774.                               contained on the floppy disk.
  4775.  
  4776.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  4777.  
  4778.                               Type: a (for Transactions By Item Report)
  4779.  
  4780.                               Note: This report can be long so there is an
  4781.                                     option to print the report for items
  4782.                                     with activity only.
  4783.  
  4784.                                     When you see:
  4785.  
  4786.                                     Print Report for Items Selected On
  4787.                                     Report Filter
  4788.  
  4789.                                     A)ll Items   W)ith Activity Only
  4790.  
  4791.                                     Type: a (for All Items selected in
  4792.                                           filter)
  4793.  
  4794.                                           -OR-
  4795.  
  4796.                                     Type: w (for Items With Transaction
  4797.                                           Activity selected in Report
  4798.                                           Filter)
  4799.  
  4800.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  4801.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  4802.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  4803.                               chapter.
  4804.  
  4805.             Report            The TRANSACTIONS BY ITEM report includes the
  4806.             Description       following information:
  4807.  
  4808.                                 . Date of the Report
  4809.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  4810.  
  4811.                                                                          5-4
  4812.  
  4813.                                                                 Reports Menu
  4814.                                                   Transactions By Entry Type
  4815.  
  4816.  
  4817.                                 . Fund(s), Report Grouping(s) or Budget
  4818.                                   Items/Categories Included on the Report
  4819.                                 . Posting Dates (beginning and end dates for
  4820.                                   report)
  4821.  
  4822.                               Information for each Fund, Report Grouping
  4823.                               and/or Budget Item/Category for Balance
  4824.                               Forward, Income, Expenses, Transfers and
  4825.                               Special Transactions includes:
  4826.  
  4827.                                 . Item (Code and Description)
  4828.                                 . Posting Date
  4829.                                 . Check Number (if applicable)
  4830.                                 . Amount
  4831.                                 . TRAN TYPE (Transaction Type: See Appendix
  4832.                                   E)
  4833.                                 . Explanation (for checks, payable to)
  4834.                                 . Sub Total for Report Period (for each
  4835.                                   Transaction Type - Expenses, Income,
  4836.                                   Specials, Transfers)
  4837.                                 . Item Total (includes all Transaction Types
  4838.                                   for each item)
  4839.  
  4840.          TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY TYPE REPORT
  4841.  
  4842.                               This report is a listing of all transactions
  4843.                               of the selected items arranged by Transaction
  4844.                               Type - Balance Forward, Expenses, Income,
  4845.                               Special, Transfers. Within the Transaction
  4846.                               Type, the transactions are arranged by Posting
  4847.                               Date for the dates selected.
  4848.  
  4849.                               You can print the TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY TYPE
  4850.                               report by any combination of Fund, Report
  4851.                               Grouping or Budget Item/Category.
  4852.  
  4853.                               You can set the beginning and end dates for
  4854.                               the report.
  4855.  
  4856.                               Floppy Disk: The report dates must be
  4857.                                     contained on the floppy disk.
  4858.  
  4859.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  4860.  
  4861.                               Type: b (for Transactions By Entry Type
  4862.                               Report)
  4863.  
  4864.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  4865.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  4866.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  4867.                               chapter.
  4868.  
  4869.                                                                          5-5
  4870.  
  4871.                                                                 Reports Menu
  4872.                                         Transactions By Entry Date (Journal)
  4873.  
  4874.  
  4875.             Report            The TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY TYPE report includes
  4876.             Description       the following information:
  4877.  
  4878.                                 . Date of the Report
  4879.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  4880.                                 . Fund(s), Report Grouping(s) or Budget
  4881.                                   Items/Categories Included on the Report
  4882.                                 . Posting Dates (beginning and end dates for
  4883.                                   report)
  4884.  
  4885.                               Information for each entry under the Entry
  4886.                               Type headings Balance Forward, Income,
  4887.                               Expenses, Transfers and Special Transactions
  4888.                               includes:
  4889.  
  4890.                                 . Posting Date
  4891.                                 . Check Number (if applicable)
  4892.                                 . Item (Code)
  4893.                                 . Amount
  4894.                                 . TRAN TYPE (Transaction Type: See Appendix
  4895.                                   E)
  4896.                                 . Explanation (for checks, payable to)
  4897.                                 . Total for Posting Period (for each Entry
  4898.                                   Type)
  4899.                                 . Grand Total (Sum of all Transaction Types
  4900.                                   for the dates specified)
  4901.  
  4902.          TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE REPORT (JOURNAL)
  4903.  
  4904.                               The TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE report lists
  4905.                               the transactions in entry date order (Journal)
  4906.                               for the Bank Account. This report is used to
  4907.                               verify transaction entries dates (audit
  4908.                               trail).
  4909.  
  4910.                               This report does not have the Report Filter
  4911.                               option.
  4912.  
  4913.                               Note: This is the only Report based on Entry
  4914.                                     date rather than Posting date.
  4915.  
  4916.                               From the ENTRY MENU,
  4917.  
  4918.                               Type: c (for Transactions By Entry Date)
  4919.  
  4920.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  4921.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  4922.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  4923.                               chapter.
  4924.  
  4925.  
  4926.  
  4927.                                                                          5-6
  4928.  
  4929.                                                                 Reports Menu
  4930.                                                     Expenses By Posting Date
  4931.  
  4932.  
  4933.             Report
  4934.             Description
  4935.  
  4936.                               The following information is included on the
  4937.                               TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE (Journal) report
  4938.                               for each Entry Date listed on the report:
  4939.  
  4940.                                 . Date of the Report
  4941.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  4942.                                 . Posting Date
  4943.                                 . Transaction Type (see Appendix E)
  4944.                                 . Item Code
  4945.                                 . Check Number (if applicable)
  4946.                                 . Item Amount (each amount within an entry)
  4947.                                 . Entry Total (Total Amount for an entry)
  4948.                                 . Pay To/Comment
  4949.                                 . Totals for Bal Fwd, Expense (sum of E &
  4950.                                   EA), Income (sum of I & IA), Special (sum
  4951.                                   of), Transfer (sum of)
  4952.                                 . Beginning Balance (for beginning of
  4953.                                   report)
  4954.                                 . Total for Report Period (the sum of the
  4955.                                   transactions for the report (+ and -))
  4956.                                 . Ending Balance (at the end of the report
  4957.                                   period)
  4958.  
  4959.                               This information will appear for all entries
  4960.                               posted for the dates specified.
  4961.  
  4962.          EXPENSES BY POSTING DATE REPORT
  4963.  
  4964.                               This report lists Expenses and Expense
  4965.                               Adjustments arranged by Posting Date.
  4966.  
  4967.                               You can print the EXPENSES BY POSTING DATE
  4968.                               report by any combination of Fund, Report
  4969.                               Grouping or Budget Item/Category.
  4970.  
  4971.                               You can set the beginning and ending date for
  4972.                               the report.
  4973.  
  4974.                               Floppy Disk:  The report dates must be
  4975.                                     contained on the floppy disk.
  4976.  
  4977.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  4978.  
  4979.                               Type: d (for Expenses By Posting Date Report)
  4980.  
  4981.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  4982.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  4983.  
  4984.  
  4985.                                                                          5-7
  4986.  
  4987.                                                                 Reports Menu
  4988.                                                             Expenses By Item
  4989.  
  4990.  
  4991.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  4992.                               chapter.
  4993.  
  4994.             Report            The EXPENSES BY POSTING DATE report includes
  4995.             Description       the following information:
  4996.  
  4997.                                 . Date of the Report
  4998.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  4999.                                 . Fund(s), Report Grouping(s) or Budget
  5000.                                   Items/Categories Included on the Report
  5001.                                 . Posting Date(s) (beginning and end dates
  5002.                                   for report)
  5003.  
  5004.                               Information for each Posting Date includes:
  5005.  
  5006.                                 . Item (Description)
  5007.                                 . Check Number (if checking account)
  5008.                                 . Amount
  5009.                                 . TR TP (Transaction Type: See Appendix E)
  5010.                                 . Payable To
  5011.                                 . Comment
  5012.                                 . Expenses for Posting Period (Total)
  5013.                                   (This total includes Expenses and Expense
  5014.                                   Adjustments for the included items for the
  5015.                                   selected date range only.)
  5016.  
  5017.          EXPENSES BY ITEM REPORT
  5018.  
  5019.                               This report lists totals for each item in all
  5020.                               Bank Accounts with summary totals for each
  5021.                               Report Grouping and Fund.
  5022.  
  5023.                               The EXPENSES BY ITEM report is a year-to-date
  5024.                               report by item for all Funds, Report Groupings
  5025.                               and Budget Items/Categories within all Bank
  5026.                               Accounts. For expenses for a particular date
  5027.                               range, use Budget vs. Expenses Report. There
  5028.                               is no date range option for this report.
  5029.  
  5030.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5031.  
  5032.                               Type: e (for Expenses By Item)
  5033.  
  5034.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5035.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5036.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5037.                               chapter.
  5038.  
  5039.             Report            The EXPENSES BY ITEM report includes the
  5040.             Description       following information:
  5041.  
  5042.  
  5043.                                                                          5-8
  5044.  
  5045.                                                                 Reports Menu
  5046.                                                       Income By Posting Date
  5047.  
  5048.  
  5049.                                 . Date of the Report
  5050.                                 . Funds (Descriptions)
  5051.                                 . Report Groupings (Descriptions)
  5052.                                 . Budget Items/Categories (Descriptions)
  5053.                                 . Amount (for each Budget Item/Category)
  5054.                                 . Report Grouping Total Expenses
  5055.                                 . Fund Total Expenses
  5056.                                 . Grand Total Expenses (year-to-date) (for
  5057.                                   items indicated)
  5058.  
  5059.          INCOME BY POSTING DATE REPORT
  5060.  
  5061.                               This report lists the Income and Income
  5062.                               Adjustment Transactions within the dates
  5063.                               selected for the items selected for the Bank
  5064.                               Account.
  5065.  
  5066.                               You can print the INCOME BY POSTING DATE
  5067.                               report by any combination of Fund, Report
  5068.                               Grouping or Budget Item/Category.
  5069.  
  5070.                               You can set the beginning and end dates for
  5071.                               the report.
  5072.  
  5073.                               Floppy Disk:  The report dates must be
  5074.                                     contained on the floppy disk.
  5075.  
  5076.                               From the REPORT MENU,
  5077.  
  5078.                               Type: f (for Income By Posting Date Report)
  5079.  
  5080.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5081.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5082.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5083.                               chapter.
  5084.  
  5085.             Report            The INCOME BY POSTING DATE report includes the
  5086.             Description       following information:
  5087.  
  5088.                                 . Date of the Report
  5089.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  5090.                                 . Fund(s), Report Grouping(s) or Budget
  5091.                                   Items/Categories Included on the Report
  5092.                                 . Posting Date(s) (beginning and end dates
  5093.                                   for report)
  5094.  
  5095.                               Information for each Posting Date includes:
  5096.  
  5097.                                 . Item (Description)
  5098.                                 . Amount
  5099.  
  5100.  
  5101.                                                                          5-9
  5102.  
  5103.                                                                 Reports Menu
  5104.                                                    Transfers By Posting Date
  5105.  
  5106.  
  5107.                                 . TRAN TYPE (Transaction Type: See Appendix
  5108.                                   E)
  5109.                                 . Comment
  5110.                                 . Income for Posting Period (Total)
  5111.  
  5112.          TRANSFERS BY POSTING DATE REPORT
  5113.  
  5114.                               This report lists Transfers In (TI) and
  5115.                               Transfers Out (TO) Transactions within the
  5116.                               dates selected for the items selected for the
  5117.                               Bank Account.
  5118.  
  5119.                               You can print the TRANSFERS BY POSTING DATE
  5120.                               report by any combination of Fund, Report
  5121.                               Grouping or Budget Item/Category.
  5122.  
  5123.                               You can set the beginning and end dates for
  5124.                               the report.
  5125.  
  5126.                               Floppy Disk:  The report dates must be
  5127.                                     contained on the floppy disk.
  5128.  
  5129.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5130.  
  5131.                               Type: g (for Transfers By Posting Date)
  5132.  
  5133.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5134.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5135.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5136.                               chapter.
  5137.  
  5138.             Report            The TRANSFERS BY POSTING DATE report includes
  5139.             Description       the following information:
  5140.  
  5141.                                 . Date of the Report
  5142.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  5143.                                 . Fund(s), Report Grouping(s) or Budget
  5144.                                   Items/Categories Included on the Report
  5145.                                 . Posting Date(s) (beginning and end dates
  5146.                                   for report)
  5147.  
  5148.                               Information for each Posting Date includes:
  5149.  
  5150.                                 . Item (Description)
  5151.                                 . Amount
  5152.                                 . TRAN TYPE (Transaction: See Appendix E)
  5153.                                 . Comment
  5154.                                 . Total Transfers for Posting Period
  5155.  
  5156.  
  5157.  
  5158.  
  5159.                                                                         5-10
  5160.  
  5161.                                                                 Reports Menu
  5162.                                                  Adjustments By Posting Date
  5163.  
  5164.  
  5165.          ADJUSTMENTS BY POSTING DATE REPORT
  5166.  
  5167.                               This report lists the Income Adjustments and
  5168.                               Expense Adjustments Transactions within the
  5169.                               dates selected for the items selected for the
  5170.                               Bank Account.
  5171.  
  5172.                               The ADJUSTMENTS BY POSTING DATE report lists
  5173.                               only the adjustments made within the specified
  5174.                               dates to the specified account.
  5175.  
  5176.                               You can print the Adjustment Report by any
  5177.                               combination of Fund, Report Grouping or Budget
  5178.                               Item/Category.
  5179.  
  5180.                               You can set the beginning and end dates for
  5181.                               the report.
  5182.  
  5183.                               Floppy Disk:  The report dates must be
  5184.                                     contained on the floppy disk.
  5185.  
  5186.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5187.  
  5188.                               Type: h (Adjustments By Posting Date)
  5189.  
  5190.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5191.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5192.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5193.                               chapter.
  5194.  
  5195.             Report            The ADJUSTMENTS BY POSTING DATE report
  5196.             Description       includes the following information:
  5197.  
  5198.                                 . Date of the Report
  5199.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  5200.                                 . Fund(s), Report Grouping(s) or Budget
  5201.                                   Items/Categories Included on the Report
  5202.                                 . Posting Date(s) (beginning and end dates
  5203.                                   for report)
  5204.  
  5205.                               Information for each Posting Date includes:
  5206.  
  5207.                                 . Item (Description)
  5208.                                 . Amount
  5209.                                 . TRAN TYPE (Transaction Type: See Appendix
  5210.                                   E)
  5211.                                 . Comment
  5212.                                 . Total Adjustments for Posting Period (This
  5213.                                   amount is the combined totals for
  5214.                                   adjustments into and out of the Bank
  5215.                                   Account.)
  5216.  
  5217.                                                                         5-11
  5218.  
  5219.                                                                 Reports Menu
  5220.                                                     Specials By Posting Date
  5221.  
  5222.  
  5223.          SPECIALS BY POSTING DATE REPORT
  5224.  
  5225.                               This report lists the Special Transactions (+
  5226.                               and -) within the dates selected for the items
  5227.                               selected for the Bank Account.
  5228.  
  5229.                               You can print the SPECIALS BY POSTING DATE
  5230.                               report by any combination of Fund, Report
  5231.                               Grouping or Budget Item/Category.
  5232.  
  5233.                               Note: Special Transactions include Balance
  5234.                                     Forward.
  5235.  
  5236.                               You can set the beginning and ending dates for
  5237.                               the report.
  5238.  
  5239.                               Floppy Disk:  The report dates must be
  5240.                                     contained on the floppy disk.
  5241.  
  5242.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5243.  
  5244.                               Type: i (for Specials By Posting Date)
  5245.  
  5246.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5247.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5248.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5249.                               chapter.
  5250.  
  5251.             Report            The SPECIALS BY POSTING DATE report includes
  5252.             Description       the following information:
  5253.  
  5254.                                 . Date of the Report
  5255.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  5256.                                 . Bank Account (Description)
  5257.                                 . Fund(s), Report Grouping(s) or Budget
  5258.                                   Items/Categories Included on the Report
  5259.                                 . Posting Date(s) (beginning and end dates
  5260.                                   for report)
  5261.  
  5262.                               Information for each Posting Date includes:
  5263.  
  5264.                                 . Item (Description)
  5265.                                 . Amount
  5266.                                 . TRAN TYPE (Transaction Type: See Appendix
  5267.                                   E)
  5268.                                 . Comment
  5269.                                 . Total Special Transactions for Posting
  5270.                                   Period
  5271.  
  5272.  
  5273.  
  5274.  
  5275.                                                                         5-12
  5276.  
  5277.                                                                 Reports Menu
  5278.                                                           Budget Vs Expenses
  5279.  
  5280.  
  5281.          BUDGET VS EXPENSES REPORT
  5282.  
  5283.                               This report lists the money designated to each
  5284.                               item through Balance Forward, Income and
  5285.                               Budget entries. The Amount Available is
  5286.                               computed by subtracting Expenses from Balance
  5287.                               Forward/Income plus Budget.
  5288.  
  5289.                               This report includes all Bank Accounts. It
  5290.                               cannot be run for a single Bank Account.
  5291.  
  5292.                               The BUDGET VS EXPENSES report can be a year-
  5293.                               to-date or date range report (Floppy: Date
  5294.                               range must be on the floppy disk).
  5295.  
  5296.                               Note: The Budget column reflects the budget
  5297.                                     for the full year if Year to Date is
  5298.                                     selected.
  5299.  
  5300.                                     The Budget column is calculated for the
  5301.                                     time span included in the report if Date
  5302.                                     Range is selected.
  5303.  
  5304.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5305.  
  5306.                               Type: j (for Budget vs Expenses Report)
  5307.  
  5308.                               Year To Date OR Date Range
  5309.  
  5310.                               Type: y (for Year To Date) or d (for Date
  5311.                               Range)
  5312.  
  5313.                               If d (for Date Range), type:
  5314.  
  5315.                               The first posting date to be included. <Enter>
  5316.  
  5317.                               The last posting date to be included. <Enter>
  5318.  
  5319.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5320.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5321.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5322.                               chapter.
  5323.  
  5324.             Report            The BUDGET VS EXPENSES report includes the
  5325.             Description       following information:
  5326.  
  5327.                                 . Date of the Report
  5328.                                 . Fund(s), Report Grouping(s) and Budget
  5329.                                   Items/Categories Included on the Report
  5330.                                 . Date Range of the Report
  5331.  
  5332.  
  5333.                                                                         5-13
  5334.  
  5335.                                                                 Reports Menu
  5336.                                                           Income Vs Expenses
  5337.  
  5338.  
  5339.                               Information for each entry includes:
  5340.  
  5341.                                 . Balance Forward/Income
  5342.                                 . Budget
  5343.                                 . Expense
  5344.                                 . Amount Available (Expense subtracted from
  5345.                                   Bal Fwd/Income plus Budget amount)
  5346.                                 . Subtotals for each Report Grouping
  5347.                                 . Fund Totals
  5348.                                 . Grand Totals
  5349.  
  5350.          INCOME VS EXPENSES REPORT
  5351.  
  5352.                               This report lists the Balance Forward, Income
  5353.                               and Expense amounts for each item. The item
  5354.                               balance is computed by subtracting Expenses
  5355.                               from Balance Forward plus Income.
  5356.  
  5357.                               This report includes all Bank Accounts. It
  5358.                               cannot be run for a single Bank Account.
  5359.  
  5360.                               The INCOME VS EXPENSES report can be a year-
  5361.                               to-date or date range report.
  5362.  
  5363.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5364.  
  5365.                               Type: k (for Income vs Expenses Report)
  5366.  
  5367.                               Year To Date OR Date Range
  5368.  
  5369.                               Type: y (for Year To Date) or d (for Date
  5370.                               Range)
  5371.  
  5372.                               If d (for Date Range), type:
  5373.  
  5374.                               The first posting date to be included. <Enter>
  5375.  
  5376.                               The last posting date to be included. <Enter>
  5377.  
  5378.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5379.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5380.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5381.                               chapter.
  5382.  
  5383.             Report            The INCOME VS EXPENSES report includes the
  5384.             Description       following information:
  5385.  
  5386.                                 . Date of the Report
  5387.                                 . Date Range of the Report
  5388.                                 . Fund (Description)
  5389.                                 . Report Grouping (Description)
  5390.  
  5391.                                                                         5-14
  5392.  
  5393.                                                                 Reports Menu
  5394.                                                            Location of Funds
  5395.  
  5396.  
  5397.                                 . Budget Item/Category (Description)
  5398.                                 . Balance Forward (for Fund and Budget
  5399.                                   Item/Category)
  5400.                                 . Income (for Fund and Budget Item/Category)
  5401.                                 . Expenses (for Fund and Budget
  5402.                                   Item/Category)
  5403.                                 . Balance (for Fund and Budget
  5404.                                   Item/Category)
  5405.                                   (The Balance is the Expenses subtracted
  5406.                                   from the Income plus the Balance Forward
  5407.                                   amount.)
  5408.                                 . Fund Totals (Bal Fwd, Income, Expenses,
  5409.                                   Balance)
  5410.                                 . Totals (for report)
  5411.  
  5412.                               Note: An asterisk (*) to the right of an item
  5413.                                     description indicates that this Fund or
  5414.                                     Budget Item/Category has money in more
  5415.                                     than one Bank Account.
  5416.  
  5417.          LOCATION OF FUNDS REPORT
  5418.  
  5419.                               This report lists the current location of
  5420.                               money for each Fund and Budget Item/Category
  5421.                               within all Bank Accounts. It cannot be run for
  5422.                               an individual Bank Account.
  5423.  
  5424.                               The LOCATION OF FUNDS REPORT includes all Bank
  5425.                               Accounts. It is a year-to-date report.
  5426.  
  5427.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5428.  
  5429.                               Type: l (letter L) (for Location Of Funds
  5430.                               Report)
  5431.  
  5432.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5433.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5434.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5435.                               chapter.
  5436.  
  5437.             Report            The LOCATION OF FUNDS report includes the
  5438.             Description       following information:
  5439.  
  5440.                                 . Date of the Report
  5441.                                 . Fund (Description)
  5442.                                 . Report Grouping (Description)
  5443.                                 . Item (Description)
  5444.  
  5445.                               Information about each Fund and Item included:
  5446.  
  5447.  
  5448.  
  5449.                                                                         5-15
  5450.  
  5451.                                                                 Reports Menu
  5452.                                                   Single Bank Account Status
  5453.  
  5454.  
  5455.                                 . Bank Account Code (all Bank Accounts that
  5456.                                   contain money for the Fund or for an Item
  5457.                                   within the Fund)
  5458.                                 . Amount (in each Bank Account)
  5459.                                 . Item Total
  5460.                                 . Fund Total
  5461.                                 . Summary of Fund (by Bank Account)
  5462.                                 . Final Fund Total
  5463.  
  5464.          SINGLE BANK ACCOUNT STATUS REPORT
  5465.  
  5466.                               This report will summarize the activity for a
  5467.                               single bank account for a specified period of
  5468.                               time. This report does not have the Report
  5469.                               Filter option.
  5470.  
  5471.                               You can set the beginning and ending dates of
  5472.                               the SINGLE BANK ACCOUNT STATUS report.
  5473.  
  5474.                               Floppy Disk:  The report dates must be
  5475.                                     contained on the floppy disk.
  5476.  
  5477.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5478.  
  5479.                               Type: m (for Single Bank Account Status)
  5480.  
  5481.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5482.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5483.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5484.                               chapter.
  5485.  
  5486.             Report            The totals will include money from all Funds
  5487.             Description       and Budget Items/Categories within the
  5488.                               specified Bank Account.
  5489.  
  5490.                               The SINGLE BANK ACCOUNT STATUS report includes
  5491.                               the following information:
  5492.  
  5493.                                 . Date of Report
  5494.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  5495.                                 . Report Dates (begin and end date of
  5496.                                   report)
  5497.  
  5498.                               Information for the Bank Account includes:
  5499.  
  5500.                                 . Beginning Balance
  5501.                                 . Income for Period
  5502.                                 . Expenses for Period
  5503.                                 . Transfers for Period
  5504.                                 . Special Transactions for Period
  5505.                                 . Ending Balance
  5506.  
  5507.                                                                         5-16
  5508.  
  5509.                                                                 Reports Menu
  5510.                                                    All Bank Accounts Summary
  5511.  
  5512.  
  5513.          ALL BANK ACCOUNTS SUMMARY REPORT
  5514.  
  5515.                               This report displays a year-to-date summary of
  5516.                               activity for each Bank Account. For a summary
  5517.                               for a particular date range, select Single
  5518.                               Bank Account Status Report.
  5519.  
  5520.                               The totals will include money from all Funds
  5521.                               and Budget Items/Categories within each Bank
  5522.                               Account and a Grand Total.
  5523.  
  5524.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5525.  
  5526.                               Type: n (for All Bank Accounts Summary Report)
  5527.  
  5528.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5529.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5530.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5531.                               chapter.
  5532.  
  5533.             Report            The ALL BANK ACCOUNTS SUMMARY report includes
  5534.             Description       the following information:
  5535.  
  5536.                                 . Date of the Report
  5537.  
  5538.                               Information for each Bank Account includes:
  5539.  
  5540.                                 . Bank Account (Code and Description)
  5541.                                 . Balance Forward
  5542.                                 . Income
  5543.                                 . Expenses
  5544.                                 . Transfers
  5545.                                 . Special
  5546.                                 . Balance
  5547.                                 . Totals (Year-to-date)
  5548.  
  5549.          ITEM CODE LIST
  5550.  
  5551.                               This list includes the Code number and
  5552.                               Description of the Fund with its Report
  5553.                               Grouping and Budget Item/Category Codes and
  5554.                               Descriptions. This report does not have the
  5555.                               Report Filter option.
  5556.  
  5557.                               This option prints the same list that is
  5558.                               displayed on the screen when you press <F10>
  5559.                               to reference a Fund, Report Grouping and
  5560.                               Budget Item/Category Code.
  5561.  
  5562.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5563.  
  5564.  
  5565.                                                                         5-17
  5566.  
  5567.                                                                 Reports Menu
  5568.                                                      Bank Accounts Code List
  5569.  
  5570.  
  5571.                               Type: o (for Item Code List)
  5572.  
  5573.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5574.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5575.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5576.                               chapter.
  5577.  
  5578.             Report            The ITEM CODE LIST includes the following
  5579.             Description       information:
  5580.  
  5581.                                 . Date of the Report
  5582.                                 . Fund Code
  5583.                                 . Fund Description
  5584.                                 . Report Grouping Code
  5585.                                 . Report Grouping Description
  5586.                                 . Budget Item/Category Code
  5587.                                 . Budget Item/Category Description
  5588.  
  5589.          BANK ACCOUNTS CODE LIST
  5590.  
  5591.                               This list includes the Code, Description and
  5592.                               Comment for each Bank Account.
  5593.  
  5594.                               This prints the same list that is displayed on
  5595.                               the screen when you press <F10> to reference a
  5596.                               Bank Account Code.
  5597.  
  5598.                               From the REPORTS MENU,
  5599.  
  5600.                               Type: p (for Bank Accounts Code List)
  5601.  
  5602.                               For a detailed explanation of the questions
  5603.                               preceding the printing of the report, see
  5604.                               Running a Report at the beginning of this
  5605.                               chapter.
  5606.  
  5607.             Report            The BANK ACCOUNT CODE LIST includes the
  5608.             Description       following information:
  5609.  
  5610.                                 . Date of the Report
  5611.                                 . Bank Account Code
  5612.                                 . Bank Account Description
  5613.                                 . Bank Account Comment
  5614.  
  5615.          QUIT
  5616.  
  5617.                               To return to the MAIN MENU,
  5618.  
  5619.                               Type: q (for Quit) from the REPORTS MENU.
  5620.  
  5621.  
  5622.  
  5623.                                                                         5-18
  5624.  
  5625.  
  5626.  
  5627.  
  5628.          DISPLAY/EDIT MENU
  5629.  
  5630.  
  5631.                               From the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU you can do the
  5632.                               following:
  5633.  
  5634.                                 . Display
  5635.                                 . Edit
  5636.                                 . Add
  5637.                                 . Delete
  5638.  
  5639.                               To the following information:
  5640.  
  5641.                                 . Budget Item/Category
  5642.                                 . Report Grouping
  5643.                                 . Fund
  5644.                                 . Bank Account
  5645.                                 . Church Information (display and edit only)
  5646.  
  5647.             Display/Edit      When the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU is first displayed
  5648.             Options:          at the bottom of the monitor, choose one of
  5649.                               the following options by typing the first
  5650.                               letter of the option you choose (or <F10> (for
  5651.                               Code List)):
  5652.  
  5653.                                 . F10) Code List
  5654.                                 . Find
  5655.                                 . Add
  5656.                                 . Quit
  5657.  
  5658.                               After a Code and its information is displayed
  5659.                               on the monitor, choose one of the following
  5660.                               options by typing the first letter of the
  5661.                               option you choose (or <F10> (for Code List)):
  5662.  
  5663.                                 . F10) Code List
  5664.                                 . Find
  5665.                                 . Edit
  5666.                                 . Previous (Display Previous Code)
  5667.                                 . Next (Display Next Code)
  5668.                                 . Add
  5669.                                 . Delete
  5670.                                 . Quit (Return to DISPLAY/EDIT MENU)
  5671.  
  5672.                               Note: Edited information or additions made on
  5673.                                     the screen are included only after you
  5674.                                     press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>).
  5675.  
  5676.          BUDGET ITEM/CATEGORY DISPLAY/EDIT
  5677.  
  5678.                               From the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU,
  5679.  
  5680.  
  5681.                                                                          6-1
  5682.  
  5683.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  5684.                                                         Budget Item/Category
  5685.  
  5686.  
  5687.                               Type: b (for Budget Item)
  5688.  
  5689.                               The BUDGET ITEM/CATEGORY DISPLAY/EDIT MENU is
  5690.                               displayed on the monitor.
  5691.  
  5692.             Code List         Press <F10> to display a list of Codes for
  5693.                               reference. (Use PgDn (Page Down) and PgUp
  5694.                               (Page Up) keys if list is more than one
  5695.                               screen.)
  5696.  
  5697.                               Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  5698.                               return to the BUDGET ITEM/CATEGORY
  5699.                               DISPLAY/EDIT screen.
  5700.  
  5701.             Find              Choose this option to locate a Budget
  5702.                               Item/Category Code quickly.
  5703.  
  5704.                               After typing f (for Find), you will type the
  5705.                               Budget Item/Category Code, press <Enter>.
  5706.  
  5707.                               (Code List)  Press <F10> to view a list of
  5708.                               Codes.
  5709.  
  5710.                               If the Code you typed cannot be located on the
  5711.                               computer (you made a mistake in typing), a
  5712.                               message at the bottom of the screen will tell
  5713.                               you it is not a Budget Item/Category Code.
  5714.                               Type the correct code (you can view the Code
  5715.                               List again, if necessary (<F10>)).
  5716.  
  5717.                               When the correct Budget Item/Category Code is
  5718.                               displayed on the monitor, press <Enter>.
  5719.  
  5720.             Edit              Once a Budget Item/Category Code is displayed
  5721.                               on the monitor, choose this option to make a
  5722.                               correction or change information.
  5723.  
  5724.                               Type: e (for Edit)
  5725.  
  5726.                               Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor control)
  5727.                               keys to move the cursor to the line you wish
  5728.                               to edit.
  5729.  
  5730.                               Press the Del (Delete) key to erase the
  5731.                               information at the cursor position.
  5732.  
  5733.                               (Code List)  Press <F10> to view a list of
  5734.                               Codes.
  5735.  
  5736.                               Type the correct information.
  5737.  
  5738.  
  5739.                                                                          6-2
  5740.  
  5741.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  5742.                                                         Budget Item/Category
  5743.  
  5744.  
  5745.                               Press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) when all information
  5746.                               is displayed correctly on the monitor.
  5747.  
  5748.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  5749.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  5750.                               keys.)
  5751.  
  5752.             Previous          Once a Budget Item/Category Code is displayed
  5753.                               on your screen, choose this option to view the
  5754.                               previous Budget Item/Category Code
  5755.                               information.
  5756.  
  5757.                               Type: p (for Previous)
  5758.  
  5759.             Next              Once a Budget Item/Category Code is displayed
  5760.                               on your screen, choose this option to view the
  5761.                               next Budget Item/Category Code information.
  5762.  
  5763.                               Type: n (for Next)
  5764.  
  5765.             Add               Choose this option to add a new Budget
  5766.                               Item/Category Code.
  5767.  
  5768.                               Type: a (for Add)
  5769.  
  5770.                               The cursor (blinking underline) is positioned
  5771.                               to the right of the words Item Code at the top
  5772.                               of the screen.
  5773.  
  5774.                               (Code List)  Press <F10> to view a list of
  5775.                               Codes previously entered.
  5776.  
  5777.                               Type the Budget Item/Category Code. <Enter>
  5778.  
  5779.                               Type the Description of the Budget
  5780.                               Item/Category Code (up to 15 characters, for
  5781.                               example: Pastor Salary)  <Enter>
  5782.  
  5783.                               Type the Amount budgeted for the full year for
  5784.                               this Budget Item/Category. (This only applies
  5785.                               to budgeted items.)
  5786.  
  5787.                               Do not use decimal point. Include dollars and
  5788.                               cents. <Enter>
  5789.  
  5790.                               Type a comment (up to 30 characters) for the
  5791.                               Budget Item/Category Code. <Enter>
  5792.  
  5793.                               Type the Report Grouping Code this Budget
  5794.                               Item/Category is attached to. <Enter>
  5795.  
  5796.  
  5797.                                                                          6-3
  5798.  
  5799.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  5800.                                                         Budget Item/Category
  5801.  
  5802.  
  5803.                               The Fund Code the Report Grouping Code is
  5804.                               attached to is automatically displayed on the
  5805.                               monitor for reference.
  5806.  
  5807.                               Note: To leave the screen without entering a
  5808.                                     Budget Item/Category, set the Budget
  5809.                                     Item/Category Code to zero before you
  5810.                                     press Ctrl-q.
  5811.  
  5812.                               Edit:
  5813.  
  5814.                               Press <Enter> to move the cursor (blinking
  5815.                               underline) to the line needing correction.
  5816.  
  5817.                               Press the Del (Delete) key to erase the
  5818.                               information at the cursor position.
  5819.  
  5820.                               Type correct information.
  5821.  
  5822.                               When all information is displayed correctly on
  5823.                               your screen,
  5824.  
  5825.                               press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>).
  5826.  
  5827.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  5828.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  5829.                               keys.)
  5830.  
  5831.                               If you need to Edit this item from this point
  5832.                               on, choose the EDIT option from the BUDGET
  5833.                               ITEM/CATEGORY DISPLAY/EDIT MENU.
  5834.  
  5835.                               To add other Budget Item/Category Codes,
  5836.                               choose ADD from the BUDGET ITEM/CATEGORY
  5837.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU again.
  5838.  
  5839.                               Initial Set Up:
  5840.  
  5841.                               Type q (for Quit) (or <Esc>) to return to the
  5842.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU after all Budget
  5843.                               Item/Category Codes have been entered from
  5844.                               your list. Return to page 1-13. and continue
  5845.                               with the set up (Enter Bank Account
  5846.                               Information).
  5847.  
  5848.             Delete            Once a Budget Item/Category Code is displayed
  5849.                               on the monitor, choose this option to delete
  5850.                               the Budget Item/Category Code and its
  5851.                               information.
  5852.  
  5853.  
  5854.  
  5855.                                                                          6-4
  5856.  
  5857.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  5858.                                                              Report Grouping
  5859.  
  5860.  
  5861.                               Note: If a Budget Item/Category is active
  5862.                                     sometime during the year, you will not
  5863.                                     be able to delete it until the following
  5864.                                     year.
  5865.  
  5866.                                     A Budget Item/Category amount that has a
  5867.                                     designated contribution carried forward
  5868.                                     to the new year will not be able to be
  5869.                                     deleted. You can move the money to a
  5870.                                     different Fund or Budget Item/Category
  5871.                                     (Income Adjustment).
  5872.  
  5873.                               You can edit the Budget Item/Category, change
  5874.                               the Code, Description and/or Report Grouping
  5875.                               it is attached to if you want to move it out
  5876.                               of a specific Report Grouping or Fund.
  5877.  
  5878.                               With the Budget Item/Category information
  5879.                               displayed on the monitor,
  5880.  
  5881.                               Type: d (for Delete)
  5882.  
  5883.                               You will be asked if you are sure.
  5884.  
  5885.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No)
  5886.  
  5887.             Quit              Choose this option to return to the
  5888.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU.
  5889.  
  5890.          REPORT GROUPING DISPLAY/EDIT
  5891.  
  5892.                               From the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU,
  5893.  
  5894.                               Type: r (for Report Grouping)
  5895.  
  5896.                               The REPORT GROUPING DISPLAY/EDIT MENU is
  5897.                               displayed on your monitor.
  5898.  
  5899.             Code List         Press <F10> to display a list of Codes for
  5900.                               reference. (Use PgDn (Page Down) and PgUp
  5901.                               (Page Up) keys if list is more than one
  5902.                               screen.)
  5903.  
  5904.                               Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  5905.                               return to REPORT GROUPING DISPLAY/EDIT screen.
  5906.  
  5907.             Find              Choose this option to locate a Report Grouping
  5908.                               Code quickly.
  5909.  
  5910.                               After typing f (for Find), type the Report
  5911.                               Grouping Code, press <Enter>.
  5912.  
  5913.                                                                          6-5
  5914.  
  5915.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  5916.                                                              Report Grouping
  5917.  
  5918.  
  5919.                               (Code List)  Press <F10> to view a list of
  5920.                               Codes.
  5921.  
  5922.                               If the Code you typed cannot be located on the
  5923.                               computer (you made a mistake in typing), a
  5924.                               message is displayed at the bottom of the
  5925.                               monitor.
  5926.  
  5927.             Edit              After a Report Grouping Code is displayed on
  5928.                               the monitor, choose this option to make a
  5929.                               correction or change information.
  5930.  
  5931.                               Type: e (for Edit)
  5932.  
  5933.                               Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor control)
  5934.                               keys to move the cursor to the line you wish
  5935.                               to edit.
  5936.  
  5937.                               Press the Del (Delete) key to erase the
  5938.                               information at the cursor position.
  5939.  
  5940.                               (Code List)  Press <F10> to view a list of
  5941.                               Codes.
  5942.  
  5943.                               Type the correct information.
  5944.  
  5945.                               Press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) when all information
  5946.                               is displayed correctly on your screen.
  5947.  
  5948.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  5949.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  5950.                               keys.)
  5951.  
  5952.             Previous          After a Report Grouping Code is displayed on
  5953.                               your screen, choose this option to view the
  5954.                               previous Report Grouping Code with its
  5955.                               information.
  5956.  
  5957.                               Type: p (for Previous)
  5958.  
  5959.             Next              After a Report Grouping Code is displayed on
  5960.                               your screen, choose this option to view the
  5961.                               next Report Grouping Code with its
  5962.                               information.
  5963.  
  5964.                               Type: n (for Next)
  5965.  
  5966.             Add               Choose this option when you want to add a new
  5967.                               Report Grouping Code.
  5968.  
  5969.                               Type: a (for Add)
  5970.  
  5971.                                                                          6-6
  5972.  
  5973.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  5974.                                                              Report Grouping
  5975.  
  5976.  
  5977.                               The cursor (blinking underline) is positioned
  5978.                               to the right of Report Grouping Code.
  5979.  
  5980.                               Type the new Report Grouping Code. <Enter>
  5981.  
  5982.                               Type the Description of the Report Grouping
  5983.                               Code (up to 15 characters, for example:
  5984.                               Christmas Music)  <Enter>
  5985.  
  5986.                               Type a comment of up to 30 characters for the
  5987.                               Report Grouping Code. <Enter>
  5988.  
  5989.                               Note: To leave the screen without entering a
  5990.                                     Report Grouping, set the Report Grouping
  5991.                                     Code to zero before you press Ctrl-q (or
  5992.                                     <Esc>).
  5993.  
  5994.                               Type the Fund Code this Report Grouping is
  5995.                               attached to. <Enter>
  5996.  
  5997.                               Edit:
  5998.  
  5999.                               Press <Enter> to move the cursor (blinking
  6000.                               underline) to the line needing correction.
  6001.  
  6002.                               Press the Del (Delete) key to erase the
  6003.                               information at the cursor position.
  6004.  
  6005.                               Type correct information.
  6006.  
  6007.                               When all information is displayed correctly on
  6008.                               the monitor, press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>)
  6009.  
  6010.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  6011.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  6012.                               keys.)
  6013.  
  6014.                               If you need to Edit this item at this point,
  6015.                               the option EDIT from the REPORT GROUPING
  6016.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU.
  6017.  
  6018.                               To add other Report Grouping Codes choose ADD
  6019.                               from the REPORT GROUPING DISPLAY/EDIT MENU
  6020.                               again.
  6021.  
  6022.                               Initial Set Up:
  6023.  
  6024.                               Type q (for Quit) to return to the
  6025.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU after all the Report
  6026.                               Grouping Codes have been entered from your
  6027.                               list. Return to page 1-12 and continue with
  6028.  
  6029.                                                                          6-7
  6030.  
  6031.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  6032.                                                                         Fund
  6033.  
  6034.  
  6035.                               the set up (Enter Budget Item/Category
  6036.                               Information.)
  6037.  
  6038.             Delete            After a Report Grouping Code is displayed on
  6039.                               your screen, you can choose this option to
  6040.                               delete the Report Grouping Code.
  6041.  
  6042.                               Note: You can only delete a Report Grouping
  6043.                                     Code if all Budget Item/Categories under
  6044.                                     this Report Grouping Code have already
  6045.                                     been deleted. This is to ensure that you
  6046.                                     do not delete a Report Grouping Code
  6047.                                     with Budget Item/Categories attached to
  6048.                                     it by mistake.
  6049.  
  6050.                               You may not want to delete a Report Grouping
  6051.                               until after the year-end reports have been
  6052.                               printed and the Posting Information files have
  6053.                               been set up for the new year.
  6054.  
  6055.                               (Code List)   Press <F10> to view a list of
  6056.                               Codes.
  6057.  
  6058.                               Type: d (for Delete)
  6059.  
  6060.                               You will be asked if you are sure. If there
  6061.                               are Budget Item/Categories attached to the
  6062.                               Report Grouping Code you wish to delete, a
  6063.                               message will be displayed on the screen.
  6064.  
  6065.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No)
  6066.  
  6067.             Quit              Choose this option to return to the
  6068.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU.
  6069.  
  6070.          FUND DISPLAY/EDIT
  6071.  
  6072.                               From the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU,
  6073.  
  6074.                               Type: f (for Fund)
  6075.  
  6076.                               The FUND DISPLAY/EDIT MENU is displayed on the
  6077.                               monitor.
  6078.  
  6079.             Code List         Press <F10> to display a list of Codes
  6080.                               previously entered. (Use PgDn (Page Down) and
  6081.                               PgUp (Page Up) keys if list is more than one
  6082.                               screen.)
  6083.  
  6084.                               Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  6085.                               return to the FUND DISPLAY/EDIT screen.
  6086.  
  6087.                                                                          6-8
  6088.  
  6089.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  6090.                                                                         Fund
  6091.  
  6092.  
  6093.             Find              Choose this option to locate a Fund Code
  6094.                               quickly.
  6095.  
  6096.                               After typing f (for Find), you will type the
  6097.                               Fund Code, press <Enter>.
  6098.  
  6099.                               If the Code you typed cannot be located on the
  6100.                               computer (you made a mistake in typing), a
  6101.                               message is displayed at the bottom of the
  6102.                               screen.
  6103.  
  6104.                               Note: New codes and information will not
  6105.                                     display on the monitor until after you
  6106.                                     leave the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU.
  6107.  
  6108.             Edit              After a Fund Code is displayed on your screen,
  6109.                               choose this option to make a correction or
  6110.                               change information.
  6111.  
  6112.                               Type: e (for Edit)
  6113.  
  6114.                               Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor control)
  6115.                               keys to move the cursor to the line you wish
  6116.                               to edit.
  6117.  
  6118.                               Press the Del (Delete) key to erase the
  6119.                               information at the cursor position.
  6120.  
  6121.                               (Code List)  Press <F10> to view a list of
  6122.                               Codes.
  6123.  
  6124.                               Type the correct information.
  6125.  
  6126.                               Press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) when all information
  6127.                               is displayed correctly on the monitor. (Hold
  6128.                               down the Ctrl (Control) key and press the
  6129.                               letter q key, then quickly release both keys.)
  6130.  
  6131.             Previous          After a Fund Code is displayed on your screen,
  6132.                               choose this option to view the previous Fund
  6133.                               Code with its information.
  6134.  
  6135.                               Type: p (for Previous)
  6136.  
  6137.             Next              After a Fund Code is displayed on your screen,
  6138.                               choose this option to view the next Fund Code
  6139.                               with its information.
  6140.  
  6141.                               Type: n (for Next)
  6142.  
  6143.             Add               Choose this option to add a new Fund Code.
  6144.  
  6145.                                                                          6-9
  6146.  
  6147.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  6148.                                                                         Fund
  6149.  
  6150.  
  6151.                               Type: a (for Add)
  6152.  
  6153.                               The cursor (blinking underline) is positioned
  6154.                               to the right of Fund Code.
  6155.  
  6156.                               Type a new Fund Code. <Enter>
  6157.  
  6158.                               Type the Description of the Fund Code (up to
  6159.                               15 characters, for example, Improvement Fnd)
  6160.                               <Enter>
  6161.  
  6162.                               Type a comment of up to 30 characters for the
  6163.                               Fund Code.
  6164.  
  6165.                               Edit:
  6166.  
  6167.                               Press <Enter> to move the cursor (blinking
  6168.                               underline) to the line needing correction.
  6169.  
  6170.                               Press the Del (Delete) key to erase the
  6171.                               information at the cursor position.
  6172.  
  6173.                               Type correct information.
  6174.  
  6175.                               When all information is displayed correctly on
  6176.                               the monitor, press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>).
  6177.  
  6178.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  6179.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  6180.                               keys.)
  6181.  
  6182.                               Note: To leave the screen without entering a
  6183.                                     Fund Code, set the code to zero before
  6184.                                     you press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>).
  6185.  
  6186.                               If you need to Edit this item at this point,
  6187.                               choose the option EDIT from the FUND
  6188.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU.
  6189.  
  6190.                               To add other Fund Codes choose ADD from the
  6191.                               FUND DISPLAY/EDIT MENU again.
  6192.  
  6193.                               (Code List)  Press <F10> to view a list of
  6194.                               Codes.
  6195.  
  6196.                               Initial Set Up:
  6197.  
  6198.                               Type q (for Quit) to return to the
  6199.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU after all Fund Codes have
  6200.                               been entered from your list. Return to page 1-12
  6201.  
  6202.  
  6203.                                                                         6-10
  6204.  
  6205.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  6206.                                                                 Bank Account
  6207.  
  6208.  
  6209.                               and continue with the set up - Enter
  6210.                               Report Grouping Information.
  6211.  
  6212.             Delete            After a Fund Code is displayed on your screen,
  6213.                               choose this option to delete a Fund Code.
  6214.  
  6215.                               Note: You can only delete a Fund Code if all
  6216.                                     Budget Item/Categories and Report
  6217.                                     Groupings under this Fund Code have
  6218.                                     already been deleted. This is to ensure
  6219.                                     that you do not delete a Fund Code with
  6220.                                     Budget Item/Categories or Report
  6221.                                     Groupings attached to it by mistake. The
  6222.                                     Fund must have no money or any activity
  6223.                                     for the current fiscal year.
  6224.  
  6225.                               Type: d (for Delete)
  6226.  
  6227.                               You will be asked if you are sure.
  6228.  
  6229.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No)
  6230.  
  6231.                               If there are Budget Item/Categories or Report
  6232.                               Groupings attached to the Fund Code you wish
  6233.                               to delete, a message is displayed on the
  6234.                               monitor.
  6235.  
  6236.             Quit              Choose this option to return to the
  6237.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU.
  6238.  
  6239.          BANK ACCOUNT DISPLAY/EDIT
  6240.  
  6241.                               There is a maximum of 15 Bank Account Codes
  6242.                               that can be entered into the program. You can
  6243.                               have 15 separate Bank Accounts (Checking,
  6244.                               Savings, Money Market, Stocks, Mutual Fund,
  6245.                               etc.).
  6246.  
  6247.                               From the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU,
  6248.  
  6249.                               Type: a (for Bank Account)
  6250.  
  6251.                               The BANK ACCOUNT DISPLAY/EDIT MENU is
  6252.                               displayed on the monitor.
  6253.  
  6254.             Code List         Press <F10> to display a list of the Bank
  6255.                               Account Codes (previous entered) for
  6256.                               reference.
  6257.  
  6258.  
  6259.  
  6260.  
  6261.                                                                         6-11
  6262.  
  6263.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  6264.                                                                 Bank Account
  6265.  
  6266.  
  6267.                               Press <F10> again (or <Esc> (Escape)) to
  6268.                               return to the BANK ACCOUNT DISPLAY/EDIT
  6269.                               screen.
  6270.  
  6271.             Find              Choose this option to locate a Bank Account
  6272.                               Code quickly.
  6273.  
  6274.                               After typing f (for Find), type the Bank
  6275.                               Account Code. <Enter>
  6276.  
  6277.                               If the Code you typed cannot be located on the
  6278.                               computer (you made a mistake in typing), a
  6279.                               message is displayed at the bottom of the
  6280.                               screen.
  6281.  
  6282.             Edit              After a Bank Account Code is displayed on your
  6283.                               screen, choose this option to make a
  6284.                               correction or change information.
  6285.  
  6286.                               Type: e (for Edit)
  6287.  
  6288.                               Use the Up and Down Arrow (cursor control)
  6289.                               keys to move the cursor to the line you wish
  6290.                               to edit.
  6291.  
  6292.                               Press the Del (Delete) key to erase the
  6293.                               information at the cursor position.
  6294.  
  6295.                               (Code List)  Press <F10> to view a list of
  6296.                               Bank Account Codes.
  6297.  
  6298.                               Type the correct information.
  6299.  
  6300.                               Press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) when all information
  6301.                               is displayed correctly on the monitor.
  6302.  
  6303.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  6304.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  6305.                               keys.)
  6306.  
  6307.             Previous          After a Bank Account Code is displayed on your
  6308.                               screen, choose this option to view the
  6309.                               previous Bank Code with its information.
  6310.  
  6311.             Next              After a Bank Account Code is displayed on your
  6312.                               screen, choose this option to view the next
  6313.                               Bank Account Code with its information.
  6314.  
  6315.             Add               Choose this option to add a new Bank Account
  6316.                               Code and information.
  6317.  
  6318.  
  6319.                                                                         6-12
  6320.  
  6321.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  6322.                                                                 Bank Account
  6323.  
  6324.  
  6325.                               Type: a (for Add)
  6326.  
  6327.                               The cursor (blinking underline) is positioned
  6328.                               to the right of Bank Account Code.
  6329.  
  6330.                               Initial Set Up:
  6331.  
  6332.                               Be sure to enter Bank Account Codes in order
  6333.                               of activity beginning with the most active
  6334.                               (checking account for budget items) to the
  6335.                               least active Bank Account).
  6336.  
  6337.                               Type the Bank Account Code. <Enter>
  6338.  
  6339.                               Type the Description of the Bank Account Code
  6340.                               (up to 30 characters). Can be numbers or
  6341.                               letters.
  6342.  
  6343.                               (Example: Checking - First National Bank)
  6344.                               <Enter>
  6345.  
  6346.                               Type a comment of up to 30 characters for the
  6347.                               Bank Account Code. <Enter>
  6348.  
  6349.                               Type Next Check Number (this will only apply
  6350.                               to an account that uses checks - leave at zero
  6351.                               for accounts without checks).
  6352.  
  6353.                               Edit:
  6354.  
  6355.                               Press <Enter> to move the cursor (blinking
  6356.                               underline) to the line needing correction.
  6357.  
  6358.                               Press the Del (Delete) key to erase the
  6359.                               information at the cursor position.
  6360.  
  6361.                               Type correct information.
  6362.  
  6363.                               When all information is displayed correctly on
  6364.                               the monitor, press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>).
  6365.  
  6366.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  6367.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  6368.                               keys.)
  6369.  
  6370.                               If you need to Edit this item at this point,
  6371.                               choose the option EDIT from the BANK ACCOUNT
  6372.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU.
  6373.  
  6374.                               To add other Bank Account Codes choose ADD
  6375.                               from the BANK ACCOUNT DISPLAY/EDIT MENU again.
  6376.  
  6377.                                                                         6-13
  6378.  
  6379.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  6380.                                                           Church Information
  6381.  
  6382.  
  6383.                               Initial Set Up:
  6384.  
  6385.                               Type q (for Quit) (or <Esc>) to return to the
  6386.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU after all Bank Account Codes
  6387.                               have been entered from your list. Return to
  6388.                               page 1-13. and continue with the set up (Set
  6389.                               Bank Account and Fund Default.)
  6390.  
  6391.             Delete            After a Bank Account Code is displayed on your
  6392.                               screen, choose this option to delete a Bank
  6393.                               Account Code.
  6394.  
  6395.                               Note: You can only delete a Bank Account Code
  6396.                                     when there is no money in the Bank
  6397.                                     Account.
  6398.  
  6399.                                     You will not be able to delete a Bank
  6400.                                     Account that has had activity during the
  6401.                                     year.
  6402.  
  6403.                               Type: d (for Delete)
  6404.  
  6405.                               If there is money in the Bank Account you are
  6406.                               trying to delete, a message will be displayed
  6407.                               on the screen.
  6408.  
  6409.                               You will be asked if you are sure.
  6410.  
  6411.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No)
  6412.  
  6413.             Quit              Choose this option to return to the
  6414.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU.
  6415.  
  6416.          CHURCH INFORMATION DISPLAY/EDIT
  6417.  
  6418.                               You will enter your Church Information (name,
  6419.                               address, etc.)
  6420.  
  6421.                               From the DISPLAY/EDIT MENU,
  6422.  
  6423.                               Type: c (for Church Information)
  6424.  
  6425.                               The DISPLAY/EDIT CHURCH INFORMATION screen is
  6426.                               displayed on the monitor.
  6427.  
  6428.                               To edit the information on the screen, press
  6429.                               <Enter> to move the cursor (blinking
  6430.                               underline) to the line you wish to change.
  6431.  
  6432.                               Press the Del (Delete) key to erase the
  6433.                               information at the cursor position.
  6434.  
  6435.                                                                         6-14
  6436.  
  6437.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  6438.                                                           Church Information
  6439.  
  6440.  
  6441.                               Type the correct information.
  6442.  
  6443.                               IMPORTANT: Type the church name and address
  6444.                               exactly as it is shown on the password slip or
  6445.                               invoice from Vian Corporation.
  6446.  
  6447.                               (Press Del (Delete) to erase the information
  6448.                               on each line before you begin to type your
  6449.                               church information.)
  6450.  
  6451.             Church Name       Type 1st line church name. <Enter>
  6452.  
  6453.                               Type 2nd line church name. <Enter>
  6454.  
  6455.                               (for no 2nd line, erase the information
  6456.                               displayed, then just press <Enter>)
  6457.  
  6458.             Address           Type 1st line church address. <Enter>
  6459.  
  6460.                               Type 2nd line church address. <Enter>
  6461.  
  6462.                               Type 3rd line church address. <Enter>
  6463.  
  6464.                               (for no 3rd line, erase the information
  6465.                               displayed, then just press <Enter>)
  6466.  
  6467.             Phone             If you type the phone number in this field, it
  6468.                               will appear on the reports below the church
  6469.                               name and address.
  6470.  
  6471.                               Type phone number. <Enter>
  6472.  
  6473.             Color             If your computer system has a color monitor,
  6474.  
  6475.                               Type: y (for Yes)
  6476.  
  6477.                               If your system has black and white, green or
  6478.                               amber monitor,
  6479.  
  6480.                               Type: n (for No)
  6481.  
  6482.             Data Drive        Indicate which drive your Posting Information
  6483.                               data will be on:
  6484.  
  6485.                               Type: a (for Drive A)
  6486.  
  6487.                               Type: b (for Drive B)
  6488.  
  6489.                               Type: c (for Drive C)  (Hard Disk system)
  6490.  
  6491.  
  6492.  
  6493.                                                                         6-15
  6494.  
  6495.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  6496.                                                           Church Information
  6497.  
  6498.  
  6499.                               (A Hard Disk system may have the Posting
  6500.                               Information data on drive A (a floppy disk) if
  6501.                               you choose. The system would then be
  6502.                               considered by the program as a floppy system.)
  6503.  
  6504.                               You may type the letter corresponding to any
  6505.                               valid drive on your system.
  6506.  
  6507.                               Initial Set Up:
  6508.  
  6509.                               Do not enter Default Bank Account or Default
  6510.                               Fund until Funds and Bank Accounts have been
  6511.                               added.
  6512.  
  6513.                               Press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) to Quit.
  6514.  
  6515.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  6516.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  6517.                               keys.)
  6518.  
  6519.             Password          Type the PASSWORD you received from Vian
  6520.                               Corporation. <Enter>
  6521.  
  6522.                               Return to page 1-11 and continue with the set up
  6523.                               - Enter Fund Information.
  6524.  
  6525.             Default Bank      This should be the Bank Account Code for the
  6526.             Account Code      most active Bank Account.  This will usually
  6527.                               be the most active checking account. When the
  6528.                               MAIN MENU is displayed at the start up of the
  6529.                               program, this Bank Account Code will be
  6530.                               displayed on the screen (Bank Account  (Now
  6531.                               ________)).
  6532.  
  6533.                               The first Bank Account you entered is
  6534.                               displayed. If you wish to change the default
  6535.                               Bank Account Code displayed, press the Del
  6536.                               (Delete) key, then type the new code.
  6537.  
  6538.                               Type the Default Bank Account Code of your
  6539.                               choice, or just  press <Enter>.
  6540.  
  6541.                               Note: If you change the Default Bank Account
  6542.                                     Code, it will be displayed at the Main
  6543.                                     Menu the next time you start up the
  6544.                                     system.
  6545.  
  6546.  
  6547.  
  6548.  
  6549.  
  6550.  
  6551.                                                                         6-16
  6552.  
  6553.                                                            Display/Edit Menu
  6554.                                                                         Quit
  6555.  
  6556.  
  6557.             Default Fund Code This should be the Fund Code of the General
  6558.                               Operation Fund (the fund from which the
  6559.                               expenses for the budget items will be
  6560.                               deducted).  This Fund Code will appear
  6561.                               automatically on the Enter Income and Enter
  6562.                               Income Adjustment screen for the 1st Budget
  6563.                               Item/Category or Fund. The default Fund code
  6564.                               is optional.
  6565.  
  6566.                               Type the Default Fund Code (or leave blank).
  6567.                               <Enter>
  6568.  
  6569.                               Note: If you change the Default Fund Code, the
  6570.                                     new code will be in effect after you
  6571.                                     press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>).
  6572.  
  6573.             Quit              Press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>) to return to
  6574.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU.
  6575.  
  6576.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  6577.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  6578.                               keys.)
  6579.  
  6580.          QUIT
  6581.  
  6582.                               To return to the MAIN MENU from the
  6583.                               DISPLAY/EDIT MENU,
  6584.  
  6585.                               Type: q (for Quit)
  6586.  
  6587.                               Note: To EXIT the program and update all your
  6588.                                     records, you must type q (for Quit) (or
  6589.                                     <Esc>) from the MAIN MENU.
  6590.  
  6591.  
  6592.  
  6593.  
  6594.  
  6595.  
  6596.  
  6597.  
  6598.  
  6599.  
  6600.  
  6601.  
  6602.  
  6603.  
  6604.  
  6605.  
  6606.  
  6607.  
  6608.  
  6609.                                                                         6-17
  6610.  
  6611.  
  6612.  
  6613.  
  6614.          PROVE BANK STATEMENT
  6615.  
  6616.  
  6617.                               Use the Prove Bank Statement option for a Bank
  6618.                               Account where you receive a regular statement
  6619.                               of transactions that may not include all
  6620.                               transactions you have entered into your
  6621.                               computer for the time period (as in a checking
  6622.                               account with outstanding checks and deposits).
  6623.  
  6624.                               If you have the type of Bank Account you can
  6625.                               compare the actual amount in the account with
  6626.                               the amount in the computer, there is no need
  6627.                               to use the Prove Bank Statement option. Use
  6628.                               the All Bank Account Summary to display the
  6629.                               amount in the computer for the Bank Account in
  6630.                               question.
  6631.  
  6632.                               The Prove Bank Statement option will assist
  6633.                               you when you prove the bank statement for the
  6634.                               Bank Account displayed at the MAIN MENU.
  6635.  
  6636.                               If the Bank Account Code is not displayed for
  6637.                               the statement you wish to prove, you can
  6638.                               change the Bank Account Code at the Main Menu.
  6639.  
  6640.          ROUTINE BANK STATEMENT RECONCILIATION
  6641.  
  6642.                          1.   Enter all Income, Expenses, Transfers and
  6643.                               Special Transactions to date into the
  6644.                               computer.
  6645.  
  6646.                               Enter any interest for the Bank Account
  6647.                               through the Enter Income screen. Include a
  6648.                               comment labeling the entry as interest for the
  6649.                               statement period.
  6650.  
  6651.                          2.   Enter service charges, charge for printing
  6652.                               checks, charge for returned checks, etc., for
  6653.                               the Bank Account through the Enter Expense
  6654.                               screen. Include a comment labeling the entry
  6655.                               as a service charge, etc. for the statement
  6656.                               period.
  6657.  
  6658.                          3.   Print the TRANSACTIONS BY ENTRY DATE (Journal)
  6659.                               to include the transactions entered after you
  6660.                               proved the last statement to the current date.
  6661.                               This report can be selected from the ENTER
  6662.                               TRANSACTION MENU (the L)ist) or the REPORTS
  6663.                               MENU. You will use this report to help you
  6664.                               determine which deposits and checks are
  6665.                               outstanding.
  6666.  
  6667.                                                                          7-1
  6668.  
  6669.                                                         Prove Bank Statement
  6670.  
  6671.  
  6672.  
  6673.                          4.   Arrange your checks (if checking account) in
  6674.                               numerical order.
  6675.  
  6676.                          5.   Arrange the deposit slips in date order.
  6677.  
  6678.                               Note: For the first few times you prove the
  6679.                                     Bank Account statement using this
  6680.                                     option, you should exit the program (by
  6681.                                     typing q (for Quit) from the Main Menu)
  6682.                                     and make a temporary backup of your
  6683.                                     Posting Information as it is at this
  6684.                                     time.
  6685.  
  6686.                                     This is to insure that you can easily
  6687.                                     redo the Prove Bank Statement if you
  6688.                                     have a problem.
  6689.  
  6690.                          6.   From the MAIN MENU,
  6691.  
  6692.                               Type: p (for Prove Bank Statement)
  6693.  
  6694.                               The PROVE BANK STATEMENT screen is displayed
  6695.                               on the monitor.
  6696.  
  6697.                          7.   Have you entered all charges and credits from
  6698.                               your bank statement? (Y/N)
  6699.  
  6700.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No).
  6701.  
  6702.                               If y (for Yes), you will next review
  6703.                               Outstanding transactions (Deposits and Checks)
  6704.                               to determine which are still outstanding (not
  6705.                               included on this statement).
  6706.  
  6707.                          8.   Review: O)utstanding  A)ll  Q)uit
  6708.  
  6709.                               Type: o (for Outstanding)
  6710.  
  6711.                               Each outstanding transaction of Income
  6712.                               (deposits), Expenses (checks), Transfers, etc.
  6713.                               for this Bank Account is displayed one at a
  6714.                               time starting from the oldest outstanding
  6715.                               transaction.
  6716.  
  6717.                               Determine if each transaction has cleared. A
  6718.                               cleared transaction is one of the following:
  6719.  
  6720.                                 . A transaction that has been processed by
  6721.                                   the financial institution and is included
  6722.                                   on the statement.
  6723.  
  6724.  
  6725.                                                                          7-2
  6726.  
  6727.                                                         Prove Bank Statement
  6728.  
  6729.  
  6730.  
  6731.                                 . A transaction that will never appear on
  6732.                                   the statement.
  6733.  
  6734.                                   Example: A void check with a corresponding
  6735.                                   expense adjustment, transfer of money from
  6736.                                   one Fund to another Fund, etc.
  6737.  
  6738.                               Note: Each adjustment should have the same
  6739.                                     status as the transaction associated
  6740.                                     with it.
  6741.  
  6742.                               If you are not sure whether a transaction
  6743.                               cleared or not, consult the Journal you
  6744.                               printed and the deposit slips and/or checks.
  6745.  
  6746.                               Did this transaction clear? (Y)es N)o Q)uit)
  6747.  
  6748.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No) or q (for
  6749.                               Quit).
  6750.  
  6751.                               Note: Remember to include interest and service
  6752.                                     charges (if applicable) as cleared
  6753.                                     transactions.
  6754.  
  6755.                          9.   Balance on Bank Account Statement.
  6756.  
  6757.                               Type ending balance as shown on the statement.
  6758.                               <Enter>
  6759.  
  6760.                          10.  You will now type the total amount of any
  6761.                               outstanding income and/or deposits not on this
  6762.                               Posting Information Disk.
  6763.  
  6764.                               There are two situations where you may have
  6765.                               outstanding income and deposits not included
  6766.                               on the disk.
  6767.  
  6768.                               The first, when you set up the system
  6769.                               initially, if there are outstanding income and
  6770.                               deposits prior to the first date you began
  6771.                               using the system, the total amount would be
  6772.                               entered here.
  6773.  
  6774.                               The second, when you set up the disk for the
  6775.                               new year (for floppy disk, this would also
  6776.                               apply when a new disk is made using New Disk
  6777.                               option), the total amount for previously and
  6778.                               still outstanding income and deposits would be
  6779.                               entered here.
  6780.  
  6781.  
  6782.  
  6783.                                                                          7-3
  6784.  
  6785.                                                         Prove Bank Statement
  6786.  
  6787.  
  6788.  
  6789.                               Type the total amount of outstanding income
  6790.                               and deposits not included on this Posting
  6791.                               Information Disk. <Enter>
  6792.  
  6793.                          11.  You will now type the total amount of any
  6794.                               outstanding checks and/or withdrawals not on
  6795.                               this Posting Information Disk.
  6796.  
  6797.                               There are two situations where you may have
  6798.                               outstanding checks and withdrawals not
  6799.                               included on the disk.
  6800.  
  6801.                               The first, when you set up the system
  6802.                               initially, if there are outstanding checks and
  6803.                               withdrawals prior to the first date you began
  6804.                               using the system, the total amount would be
  6805.                               entered here.
  6806.  
  6807.                               The second, when you set up the disk for the
  6808.                               new year (for floppy disk, this would also
  6809.                               apply when a new disk is made using New Disk
  6810.                               option), the total amount of previously and
  6811.                               still outstanding checks and withdrawals would
  6812.                               be entered here.
  6813.  
  6814.                               Type the total amount of outstanding checks
  6815.                               and withdrawals not on this Posting
  6816.                               Information Disk.
  6817.  
  6818.                               Edit: Use Up and Down Arrow (cursor control)
  6819.                                     keys to move the cursor to the line
  6820.                                     needing correction. Press Del (Delete)
  6821.                                     to erase the information at the cursor
  6822.                                     position. Type the correct information.
  6823.  
  6824.                               When the information is displayed correctly on
  6825.                               the monitor, press Ctrl-q (or Esc).
  6826.  
  6827.                               (Hold down the Ctrl (Control) key and press
  6828.                               the letter q key, then quickly release both
  6829.                               keys.)
  6830.  
  6831.             Output To         Type: p (for Printer), s (for Screen) or q
  6832.                               (for Quit)
  6833.  
  6834.                               If p (for Print),
  6835.  
  6836.                               Position paper, then turn on printer. <Enter>
  6837.  
  6838.                               Report being generated on printer.
  6839.  
  6840.  
  6841.                                                                          7-4
  6842.  
  6843.                                                         Prove Bank Statement
  6844.  
  6845.  
  6846.  
  6847.                               Report complete. <Enter>
  6848.  
  6849.                               The MAIN MENU is displayed on the monitor.
  6850.  
  6851.                               Note: Amounts in parenthesis indicate a
  6852.                                     deduction from the Bank Account.
  6853.  
  6854.                               If you accidentally mark a transaction as
  6855.                               cleared when it has not, you may review all
  6856.                               transactions using the "All" option to correct
  6857.                               it. This option will display all transactions
  6858.                               starting from the most recent date. It will
  6859.                               ask you to indicate whether it has cleared or
  6860.                               not. If you would like to review a transaction
  6861.                               without changing its status, press <Enter> to
  6862.                               display the next transaction.
  6863.  
  6864.                               If a transaction is outstanding, it is marked
  6865.                               ** OUTSTANDING ** in the upper right of the
  6866.                               screen. This will aid in locating the
  6867.                               incorrect transaction quickly.
  6868.  
  6869.                               When you have made the correction or completed
  6870.                               the review of the transactions in question,
  6871.                               press q (for Quit) (or Esc) to display the
  6872.                               Balance screen where you can continue to prove
  6873.                               the statement.
  6874.  
  6875.                               Note: If the final total in the computer does
  6876.                                     not equal the ending balance on the bank
  6877.                                     statement, a message is displayed with
  6878.                                     the amount over or under.
  6879.  
  6880.                               If you forgot to enter a transaction into the
  6881.                               computer and you have begun the Prove Bank
  6882.                               Statement option, continue to the end to see
  6883.                               if the amount the ending balance is off is
  6884.                               equal to the missed transaction. Enter the
  6885.                               missing transaction into the Bank Account
  6886.                               through the ENTER TRANSACTION MENU, then use
  6887.                               the Prove Bank Statement again. This time the
  6888.                               only transaction you will have to mark as
  6889.                               having cleared is the missing transaction when
  6890.                               it is displayed on the screen. If you made any
  6891.                               corrections print the Journal again for your
  6892.                               records.
  6893.  
  6894.             Report            The PROVE BANK STATEMENT report includes the
  6895.             Description       following information:
  6896.  
  6897.                                 . The Date of the Report
  6898.  
  6899.                                                                          7-5
  6900.  
  6901.                                                         Prove Bank Statement
  6902.  
  6903.  
  6904.  
  6905.                                 . Bank Account (Code)
  6906.                                 . Balance on Bank Account Statement
  6907.                                 . Outstanding Income and Deposits
  6908.                                 . Outstanding Checks and Withdrawals
  6909.                                 . Adjusted Balance
  6910.                                 . Amount Over Or Under (if applicable)
  6911.  
  6912.  
  6913.  
  6914.  
  6915.  
  6916.  
  6917.  
  6918.  
  6919.  
  6920.  
  6921.  
  6922.  
  6923.  
  6924.  
  6925.  
  6926.  
  6927.  
  6928.  
  6929.  
  6930.  
  6931.  
  6932.  
  6933.  
  6934.  
  6935.  
  6936.  
  6937.  
  6938.  
  6939.  
  6940.  
  6941.  
  6942.  
  6943.  
  6944.  
  6945.  
  6946.  
  6947.  
  6948.  
  6949.  
  6950.  
  6951.  
  6952.  
  6953.  
  6954.  
  6955.  
  6956.  
  6957.                                                                          7-6
  6958.  
  6959.  
  6960.  
  6961.          UTILITIES MENU
  6962.  
  6963.  
  6964.                               The Utilities Menu includes the following
  6965.                               options:
  6966.  
  6967.                                 . New Disk (Floppy Data Drive only)
  6968.                                 . Year End (set up Posting Information Disk
  6969.                                   or subdirectory for new year)
  6970.                                 . Repair (for Indexes)
  6971.                                 . Disk Status
  6972.                                 . Install (on and off toggle options)
  6973.                                 . Translate (convert Posting Information to
  6974.                                   ASCII files with two types of formats)
  6975.                                 . Quit (return to Main Menu)
  6976.  
  6977.          NEW DISK (FLOPPY DATA DISK ONLY)
  6978.  
  6979.                               This option is used only by computer systems
  6980.                               using floppy data disks.
  6981.  
  6982.                               The New Disk option subtotals each Fund and
  6983.                               Budget Item/Category and carries it forward.
  6984.  
  6985.                               IMPORTANT: You must have a backup copy of the
  6986.                               current Posting Information Disk before you
  6987.                               use the New Disk Option. You will be using
  6988.                               both the Posting Information Disk and the copy
  6989.                               during the New Disk Option. Label the copy
  6990.                               "Posting Information Disk #2" and include the
  6991.                               current date.
  6992.  
  6993.                               When the disk space used on the floppy data
  6994.                               disk reaches a certain level, a message is
  6995.                               displayed on the monitor to set up a new disk
  6996.                               with the New Disk option.
  6997.  
  6998.                               At this point, you can check the disk status
  6999.                               (See Disk Status on the Utilities Menu) to see
  7000.                               how much space there is actually left on the
  7001.                               disk. You can then plan when you will execute
  7002.                               the New Disk Option.
  7003.  
  7004.                               You should try to keep the complete month's
  7005.                               record on the same disk, if possible. When you
  7006.                               run the reports, the dates (Beginning and
  7007.                               Ending dates) for the report must be on the
  7008.                               same disk (year-to-date reports are correct
  7009.                               from disk to disk).
  7010.  
  7011.                               Note: Hard disk systems will not have to use
  7012.                                     this feature for the disk can store the
  7013.  
  7014.  
  7015.                                                                          8-1
  7016.  
  7017.                                                               Utilities Menu
  7018.                                                            New Disk (Floppy)
  7019.  
  7020.  
  7021.                                     entire year's transactions in a single
  7022.                                     subdirectory.
  7023.  
  7024.                          1.   Transactions for all Bank Accounts should be
  7025.                               brought up to date.
  7026.  
  7027.                          2.   Print a List (Journal) for any transactions
  7028.                               just entered.
  7029.  
  7030.                          3.   From the Main Menu, select the Prove Bank
  7031.                               Statement option.
  7032.  
  7033.                               You will not prove the bank statement, but you
  7034.                               will use this option to print out a list of
  7035.                               outstanding Deposits and Expenses.
  7036.  
  7037.                                 . Have you entered all charges and credits
  7038.                                   from your bank statement?
  7039.                                   Answer yes, type: y
  7040.  
  7041.                                 . Review: O)utstanding A)ll Q)uit
  7042.  
  7043.                                   Type: q (for Quit)
  7044.  
  7045.                                 . Balance on Bank Account Statement:
  7046.  
  7047.                                   Do not enter any amounts on this screen.
  7048.  
  7049.                                   Press Ctrl-q (or <Esc>)
  7050.  
  7051.                                 . Output to: Type: p (for Printer)
  7052.  
  7053.                                 . Report generated on printer.
  7054.  
  7055.                          4.   Start up the program using the current Posting
  7056.                               Information disk as you would normally.
  7057.  
  7058.                          5.   From the MAIN MENU,
  7059.  
  7060.                               Type: u (for Utilities Menu)
  7061.  
  7062.                          6.   The UTILITIES MENU is displayed on the
  7063.                               monitor.
  7064.  
  7065.                               Type: n (for New Disk)
  7066.  
  7067.                          7.   A warning is displayed on the monitor. Read
  7068.                               the warning and follow the directions.
  7069.  
  7070.                               Do you want to continue? (Y/N)
  7071.  
  7072.  
  7073.                                                                          8-2
  7074.  
  7075.                                                               Utilities Menu
  7076.                                                                     Year End
  7077.  
  7078.  
  7079.                               Type: y (for Yes) or N (for No).
  7080.  
  7081.                          8.   Do you have your OLD Posting Information Disk
  7082.                               in your data drive? (Y/N)
  7083.  
  7084.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No).
  7085.  
  7086.                               If n (for No), put your old Posting
  7087.                               Information Disk in the data drive when told
  7088.                               to do so.
  7089.  
  7090.                          9.   After a few seconds, a beep is heard and a
  7091.                               message is displayed at the bottom of the
  7092.                               monitor:
  7093.  
  7094.                               Put your NEW Posting Information Disk in your
  7095.                               data drive now. Press <Enter> to continue.
  7096.  
  7097.                               Follow the directions, then press <Enter>.
  7098.  
  7099.                          10.  Posting Date For Fund and/or Budget
  7100.                               Item/Category amounts brought forward.
  7101.  
  7102.                               Today's date is displayed. You may type in a
  7103.                               date other than the current date, if desired.
  7104.  
  7105.                               Note: The date you type in here is the first
  7106.                                     date for the new disk. <Enter>
  7107.  
  7108.                          11.  The Fund, Report Group and Budget
  7109.                               Item/Category name is displayed as it is
  7110.                               processed.
  7111.  
  7112.                          12.  New Disk complete. <Enter>
  7113.  
  7114.                               When the next statement comes from the bank,
  7115.                               follow the procedure outlined in the manual
  7116.                               (Prove Bank Statement). When proving the
  7117.                               statement, check off all the transactions on
  7118.                               the list that have cleared. Enter the total of
  7119.                               the income and total of the expenses that have
  7120.                               not cleared as "Outstanding transactions not
  7121.                               on this disk" during the Prove Bank Statement
  7122.                               option. Do this for each statement until all
  7123.                               checks and deposits from the list have
  7124.                               cleared.
  7125.  
  7126.  
  7127.  
  7128.  
  7129.  
  7130.  
  7131.                                                                          8-3
  7132.  
  7133.                                                               Utilities Menu
  7134.                                                                     Year End
  7135.  
  7136.  
  7137.          YEAR END
  7138.  
  7139.                               The Year End option is used to set up the
  7140.                               Posting Information files for the new church
  7141.                               year.
  7142.  
  7143.                               The Year End option will carry the amounts of
  7144.                               money remaining forward for each Fund and
  7145.                               Budget Item/Category (having an amount
  7146.                               designated specifically to the Fund or Budget
  7147.                               Item/Category) and place it in the computer as
  7148.                               a Balance Forward transaction for the new
  7149.                               year. It will be automatically labeled Balance
  7150.                               Forward (BF).
  7151.  
  7152.                               If there has been designated income (donated
  7153.                               amount) for a specific budgeted item, the
  7154.                               computer will check to see if the amount spent
  7155.                               on that item for the year exceeded the budget.
  7156.                               If the amount spent exceeded the budgeted
  7157.                               amount, the computer will deduct the amount
  7158.                               overspent from the designated income amount
  7159.                               before carrying it forward for the new year.
  7160.                               The computer will deduct from the designated
  7161.                               amount beginning from the most active to the
  7162.                               least active Bank Account (if there is
  7163.                               designated money in more than one Bank
  7164.                               Account).
  7165.  
  7166.                               Note: Any amount designated in the Special
  7167.                                     Transaction Type for a Budget
  7168.                                     Item/Category (or Fund) will be carried
  7169.                                     over to the new year for the Budget
  7170.                                     Item/Category (or Fund) under Special
  7171.                                     Transaction (S+ or S-).
  7172.  
  7173.                               Note: There are toggles in the Utilities Menu
  7174.                                     (in the Install option) you should look
  7175.                                     at before you run this Year End
  7176.                                     procedure.
  7177.  
  7178.                          1.   Locate the procedure in the General
  7179.                               Information section of the manual under the
  7180.                               heading Year End Routine.
  7181.  
  7182.                               You must progress through the Year End Routine
  7183.                               in the General Information section of the
  7184.                               manual (page 2-3) before continuing here.
  7185.  
  7186.  
  7187.  
  7188.  
  7189.                                                                          8-4
  7190.  
  7191.                                                               Utilities Menu
  7192.                                                                       Repair
  7193.  
  7194.  
  7195.                          2.   Start up the program using the current Posting
  7196.                               Information disk (or subdirectory) as you
  7197.                               would normally.
  7198.  
  7199.                          3.   Floppy and Hard Disk System:
  7200.  
  7201.                               From the MAIN MENU,
  7202.  
  7203.                               Type: u (for Utilities Menu)
  7204.  
  7205.                          4.   The UTILITIES MENU is displayed on the
  7206.                               monitor.
  7207.  
  7208.                               Type: y (for Year End)
  7209.  
  7210.                          5.   The following warning is displayed on the
  7211.                               monitor:
  7212.  
  7213.                               This procedure will erase the transaction data
  7214.                               on this Posting Information Disk or
  7215.                               subdirectory. Be sure you have a backup copy
  7216.                               before continuing.
  7217.  
  7218.                               Do you want to continue? (Y/N)
  7219.  
  7220.                               Type: y (for Yes) or N (for No).
  7221.  
  7222.                          6.   Posting date for amounts brought forward.
  7223.  
  7224.                               Current date shown. (Type previous date if
  7225.                               necessary.) <Enter>
  7226.  
  7227.                          7.   The Fund, Report Group and Budget
  7228.                               Item/Category name is displayed on the monitor
  7229.                               as it is processed.
  7230.  
  7231.                               Year End complete. <Enter>
  7232.  
  7233.                               Return to the Year End Procedure in the
  7234.                               General Information section (page 2-6) of this
  7235.                               manual.
  7236.  
  7237.          REPAIR MENU
  7238.  
  7239.                               The REPAIR MENU is used to repair indices and
  7240.                               recalculate amounts when the Posting
  7241.                               Information does not appear to be correct. If
  7242.                               the recalculation and/or Index repair does not
  7243.                               solve the problem, the data on the disk is not
  7244.                               usable. You must reconstruct the data from the
  7245.                               last good back up.
  7246.  
  7247.                                                                          8-5
  7248.  
  7249.                                                               Utilities Menu
  7250.                                                                  Disk Status
  7251.  
  7252.  
  7253.                               This process may take a long time. It is based
  7254.                               on the number of transactions Bank Accounts
  7255.                               and codes entered on your disk.
  7256.  
  7257.                               From the UTILITIES MENU,
  7258.  
  7259.                               Type: r (for Repair Menu)
  7260.  
  7261.                               The REPAIR MENU is displayed on the monitor.
  7262.  
  7263.                               Do you want to continue? (Y/N)
  7264.  
  7265.                               Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No).
  7266.  
  7267.                               If y (for Yes),
  7268.  
  7269.                               Code Index being repaired.
  7270.  
  7271.                               Transactions for each Bank Account being
  7272.                               repaired.
  7273.  
  7274.                               Recalculation of all year to date totals in
  7275.                               all Bank Accounts.
  7276.  
  7277.                               Repair complete. <Enter>
  7278.  
  7279.          DISK STATUS
  7280.  
  7281.                               The DISK STATUS option displays the following
  7282.                               disk information:
  7283.  
  7284.                                 . First and last entry date
  7285.                                 . First and last posting date
  7286.                                 . Space available on the disk
  7287.                                 . The number of transactions for each Bank
  7288.                                   Account
  7289.  
  7290.                               Type: d (for Disk Status)
  7291.  
  7292.                               The first and last entry and posting dates are
  7293.                               displayed.
  7294.  
  7295.                               The space available on the disk is displayed.
  7296.  
  7297.                               Press <Enter> to continue.
  7298.  
  7299.                               The Bank Account Codes and the number of
  7300.                               transactions for each Bank Account are
  7301.                               displayed.
  7302.  
  7303.                               Press <Enter> to return to the UTILITIES MENU.
  7304.  
  7305.                                                                          8-6
  7306.  
  7307.                                                               Utilities Menu
  7308.                                                            Install (Toggles)
  7309.  
  7310.  
  7311.          INSTALL (TOGGLES)
  7312.  
  7313.                               The INSTALL screen allows you to turn the
  7314.                               following options off or on:
  7315.  
  7316.             Use Report Filter ON:
  7317.  
  7318.                               You have the option to save the report filter
  7319.                               at the conclusion of each report.
  7320.  
  7321.                               If report filters have been saved on the disk
  7322.                               and the toggle is on, you have the option to
  7323.                               use one of the saved report filters.
  7324.  
  7325.                               OFF:
  7326.  
  7327.                               No reference is made to saving or retrieving
  7328.                               report filters.
  7329.  
  7330.             Clear Budget      ON:
  7331.             Amounts (Balance
  7332.             Forward for New
  7333.             Year)
  7334.  
  7335.                               The Budget amount for each item is set to zero
  7336.                               during Year End process.
  7337.  
  7338.                               OFF:
  7339.  
  7340.                               The Budget amount for each item remains
  7341.                               unchanged after Year End process.
  7342.  
  7343.             Clear Designated  ON:
  7344.             Income (Balance
  7345.             Forward for New
  7346.             Year)
  7347.  
  7348.                               All money is put into the Fund (the Fund At
  7349.                               Large). No money will be credited to an
  7350.                               individual Budget Item/Category.
  7351.  
  7352.                               OFF:
  7353.  
  7354.                               Individual Budget Item/Categories with
  7355.                               designated income that has not been totally
  7356.                               spent, the designated amount left after
  7357.                               deducting the amount overspent will be carried
  7358.                               forward. If the budget was overspent, the
  7359.                               amount overspent will be deducted from the
  7360.                               designated amount before the amount is carried
  7361.                               forward.
  7362.  
  7363.                                                                          8-7
  7364.  
  7365.                                                               Utilities Menu
  7366.                                                                    Translate
  7367.  
  7368.  
  7369.                               If a Budget Item/Category has money in more
  7370.                               than one account, it will keep deducting from
  7371.                               each account until the amount overspent has
  7372.                               been reached. (In the order the Bank Accounts
  7373.                               are displayed on the Bank Account Code List.)
  7374.  
  7375.          TRANSLATE MENU
  7376.  
  7377.                               Tutorial Mode (floppy disk): Use the Tutorial-
  7378.                               Trial Disk to store the Translate information.
  7379.  
  7380.                               There must be enough room on your disk to
  7381.                               create a file for the translated information.
  7382.  
  7383.                               Single Floppy: You can only save the
  7384.                               translated information on the A drive (unless
  7385.                               you have a RAM disk - refer to your computer
  7386.                               manual or dealer).
  7387.  
  7388.                               Dual Floppy: Format a new disk before you
  7389.                               proceed with the Translate option. You will be
  7390.                               instructed on the screen during the procedure
  7391.                               to remove the Program Disk from drive A and
  7392.                               place a newly formatted disk in drive A. The
  7393.                               translated information will be stored on the
  7394.                               formatted disk in drive A. (Do not use your
  7395.                               program disk to store the translated
  7396.                               information.)
  7397.  
  7398.                               Hard Disk: You can store the translated
  7399.                               information in the subdirectory of your choice
  7400.                               or on a formatted floppy in drive A. To store
  7401.                               the information on a floppy in drive A, place
  7402.                               a newly formatted disk in drive A before you
  7403.                               begin the Translate option.
  7404.  
  7405.                               You can translate the files to be use by word
  7406.                               processor or spread sheet software.
  7407.  
  7408.                          1.   From the Utilities Menu,
  7409.  
  7410.                               Type: t (for Translate)
  7411.  
  7412.                          2.   Type the letters of the items you want
  7413.                               included from the list on the screen.
  7414.  
  7415.                          3.   Press <Enter> when list is complete.
  7416.  
  7417.  
  7418.  
  7419.  
  7420.  
  7421.                                                                          8-8
  7422.  
  7423.                                                               Utilities Menu
  7424.                                                                    Translate
  7425.  
  7426.  
  7427.                               C)odes
  7428.                               Y) Entry Type
  7429.                               D)escription
  7430.                               R)eport Group
  7431.                               F)und
  7432.                               G) Budgeted Amount
  7433.                               B)alance Forward
  7434.                               E)xpenses
  7435.                               I)ncome
  7436.                               T)ransfers
  7437.                               S)pecial Transactions
  7438.                               M) Comment
  7439.  
  7440.                               Your Choice: _______
  7441.  
  7442.                               Note: The file containing the translated
  7443.                                     information will be arranged in the same
  7444.                                     order it appears on the choice screen
  7445.                                     (Codes, Entry Type, etc.).
  7446.  
  7447.                          4.   Enter name of file to send to: (Hard disk
  7448.                               include path name)
  7449.  
  7450.                               The disk drive name and file name to be sent
  7451.                               to is displayed on the monitor.
  7452.  
  7453.                               A:ITMCODE.ASC__________________________
  7454.  
  7455.                               (Tutorial: Send the translated information to
  7456.                               the file name displayed on your screen.)
  7457.  
  7458.                               You can edit the name if necessary. <Enter>
  7459.  
  7460.                          5.   C)arriage return after each field.
  7461.                               Q)uotes around each field and commas between
  7462.                               each field.
  7463.  
  7464.                               Type: c (for Carriage Return) or q (for
  7465.                               Quotes).
  7466.  
  7467.                          6.   Information being sent to disk file. Press any
  7468.                               key to stop (to stop before end of
  7469.                               translation).
  7470.  
  7471.  
  7472.  
  7473.  
  7474.  
  7475.  
  7476.  
  7477.  
  7478.  
  7479.                                                                          8-9
  7480.  
  7481.                                                               Utilities Menu
  7482.                                                                         Quit
  7483.  
  7484.  
  7485.                               Field Types:
  7486.  
  7487.                               C)odes - Numeric
  7488.                               Y) Entry Type - Text
  7489.                               D)escription - Text
  7490.                               R)eport Group - Numeric
  7491.                               F)und - Numeric
  7492.                               G) Budgeted Amount - Numeric
  7493.                               B)alance Forward - Numeric
  7494.                               E)xpenses - Numeric
  7495.                               I)ncome - Numeric
  7496.                               T)ransfers - Numeric
  7497.                               S)pecial Transactions - Numeric
  7498.                               M) Comment - Text
  7499.  
  7500.          QUIT
  7501.  
  7502.                               Type: q (for Quit) to return to the MAIN MENU.
  7503.  
  7504.  
  7505.  
  7506.  
  7507.  
  7508.  
  7509.  
  7510.  
  7511.  
  7512.  
  7513.  
  7514.  
  7515.  
  7516.  
  7517.  
  7518.  
  7519.  
  7520.  
  7521.  
  7522.  
  7523.  
  7524.  
  7525.  
  7526.  
  7527.  
  7528.  
  7529.  
  7530.  
  7531.  
  7532.  
  7533.  
  7534.  
  7535.  
  7536.  
  7537.                                                                         8-10
  7538.  
  7539.  
  7540.  
  7541.  
  7542.          SUBDIRECTORY (NOW ________)
  7543.  
  7544.  
  7545.          HARD DISK ONLY
  7546.  
  7547.                               To change the subdirectory you are currently
  7548.                               working in, from the MAIN MENU,
  7549.  
  7550.                               Type: s (for Subdirectory)
  7551.  
  7552.                               Type the new subdirectory name (valid DOS
  7553.                               name) <Enter>
  7554.  
  7555.                               Note: If Church Treasurer files are not in the
  7556.                                     subdirectory you typed, you will be
  7557.                                     asked if the files should be created in
  7558.                                     the new subdirectory.
  7559.  
  7560.                               Change subdirectories if you want to view last
  7561.                               year's activity that is saved in a separate
  7562.                               subdirectory. You can only print reports
  7563.                               within one subdirectory at a time.
  7564.  
  7565.                               The current subdirectory is displayed at the
  7566.                               MAIN MENU.
  7567.  
  7568.  
  7569.  
  7570.  
  7571.  
  7572.  
  7573.  
  7574.  
  7575.  
  7576.  
  7577.  
  7578.  
  7579.  
  7580.  
  7581.  
  7582.  
  7583.  
  7584.  
  7585.  
  7586.  
  7587.  
  7588.  
  7589.  
  7590.  
  7591.  
  7592.  
  7593.  
  7594.  
  7595.                                                                          9-1
  7596.  
  7597.  
  7598.  
  7599.  
  7600.          SET POSTING INFORMATION DISK NAME (NOW ________)
  7601.  
  7602.  
  7603.          FLOPPY DISK ONLY:
  7604.  
  7605.                               The name of the Posting Information Disk
  7606.                               (floppy disk) is automatically set to CTDAT
  7607.                               (Church Treasurer Data). This is used for the
  7608.                               Church Income and Expenses.
  7609.  
  7610.                               If there are other church organizations
  7611.                               (Sunday School, etc.) with their own Bank
  7612.                               Accounts, Funds, Report Groupings and Budget
  7613.                               Items/Categories, you will have to use a
  7614.                               different set of Posting Information Disks
  7615.                               (set up as described in Appendix C) and name
  7616.                               them accordingly.
  7617.  
  7618.                               To set the floppy disk name for the new
  7619.                               Posting Information Disk, from the MAIN MENU,
  7620.  
  7621.                               Type: s (for Set)
  7622.  
  7623.                               Type the name of the new Posting Information
  7624.                               Disk in your data drive (maximum: 8
  7625.                               characters). <Enter>
  7626.  
  7627.                               You will know which Posting Information Disk
  7628.                               is in you data drive by the Posting
  7629.                               Information Disk name displayed at the upper
  7630.                               left of the appropriate screens.
  7631.  
  7632.                               The current Posting Information Disk name is
  7633.                               also displayed at the MAIN MENU.
  7634.  
  7635.  
  7636.  
  7637.  
  7638.  
  7639.  
  7640.  
  7641.  
  7642.  
  7643.  
  7644.  
  7645.  
  7646.  
  7647.  
  7648.  
  7649.  
  7650.  
  7651.  
  7652.  
  7653.                                                                         10-1
  7654.  
  7655.  
  7656.  
  7657.  
  7658.          CHANGE POSTING INFORMATION DISK (NOW ________)
  7659.  
  7660.  
  7661.          FLOPPY DISK ONLY:
  7662.  
  7663.                               To change your Posting Information Disk from
  7664.                               the one presently in your data drive, at the
  7665.                               MAIN MENU,
  7666.  
  7667.                               Type: c (for Change)
  7668.  
  7669.                               You are instructed (on the screen) to put the
  7670.                               disk you want to use in your data drive.
  7671.                               <Enter>
  7672.  
  7673.                               The number (and name) of the Posting
  7674.                               Information Disk currently in your data drive
  7675.                               is displayed at the Main Menu. The number and
  7676.                               name of the Posting Information Disk is also
  7677.                               displayed on other appropriate screens.
  7678.  
  7679.  
  7680.  
  7681.  
  7682.  
  7683.  
  7684.  
  7685.  
  7686.  
  7687.  
  7688.  
  7689.  
  7690.  
  7691.  
  7692.  
  7693.  
  7694.  
  7695.  
  7696.  
  7697.  
  7698.  
  7699.  
  7700.  
  7701.  
  7702.  
  7703.  
  7704.  
  7705.  
  7706.  
  7707.  
  7708.  
  7709.  
  7710.  
  7711.                                                                         11-1
  7712.  
  7713.  
  7714.  
  7715.  
  7716.          APPENDIX
  7717.  
  7718.  
  7719.          EDIT INFORMATION
  7720.  
  7721.             Left Arrow        Moves cursor left one character at a time.
  7722.  
  7723.             Ctrl and Left     Moves cursor left one word at a time.
  7724.             Arrow
  7725.  
  7726.  
  7727.             Right Arrow       Moves cursor right one character at a time.
  7728.  
  7729.             Ctrl and Right    Moves cursor right one word at a time.
  7730.             Arrow
  7731.  
  7732.  
  7733.             Backspace         Moves cursor left one character at a time and
  7734.                               erases character.
  7735.  
  7736.             Delete (Del)      Erases entire line of characters.
  7737.  
  7738.             Ctrl-g            Erases one character.
  7739.  
  7740.             Down Arrow        Moves cursor to next field position.
  7741.  
  7742.             Up Arrow          Moves cursor to previous field position.
  7743.  
  7744.  
  7745.  
  7746.                               ____________________________________________
  7747.  
  7748.  
  7749.  
  7750.             Edit Words        You may insert characters or words into a
  7751.                               line. Position the cursor at the insertion
  7752.                               point by using a combination of the above
  7753.                               commands. Begin to type. The characters or
  7754.                               words to the right of the cursor will shift
  7755.                               right one space for each character inserted.
  7756.  
  7757.             Edit Numbers      To replace old number information with new,
  7758.                               position the cursor on the line to be changed.
  7759.                               Begin to type. If you type a wrong number,
  7760.                               press the BACKSPACE or Del (Delete) key and
  7761.                               re-enter the number. If you use the number
  7762.                               pad, you must press the shift and Del (Delete)
  7763.                               keys.
  7764.  
  7765.  
  7766.  
  7767.  
  7768.  
  7769.                                                                         12-1
  7770.  
  7771.                                                                   Appendix B
  7772.                                                               Update Program
  7773.  
  7774.  
  7775.          UPDATE PROGRAM
  7776.  
  7777.             Single Floppy, Dual Floppy and Hard Disk System:
  7778.  
  7779.                               1.    Put the new Tutorial-Trial Disk in drive
  7780.                                     A.
  7781.  
  7782.                               2.    Type: a:install (Press <Enter>)
  7783.  
  7784.                               3.    At the First-time User Instruction
  7785.                                     Screen, press <Enter>
  7786.  
  7787.                               4.    Select: Update Program
  7788.  
  7789.                                     Note: For Single Floppy System, enter
  7790.                                           the letter A for both SOURCE and
  7791.                                           DESTINATION.
  7792.  
  7793.                               5.    Follow the instructions on the screen.
  7794.  
  7795.  
  7796.  
  7797.  
  7798.  
  7799.  
  7800.  
  7801.  
  7802.  
  7803.  
  7804.  
  7805.  
  7806.  
  7807.  
  7808.  
  7809.  
  7810.  
  7811.  
  7812.  
  7813.  
  7814.  
  7815.  
  7816.  
  7817.  
  7818.  
  7819.  
  7820.  
  7821.  
  7822.  
  7823.  
  7824.  
  7825.  
  7826.  
  7827.                                                                         12-2
  7828.  
  7829.                                                                   Appendix C
  7830.                                            Dual Floppy Disk Set Up Procedure
  7831.  
  7832.  
  7833.          DUAL FLOPPY DISK SET UP PROCEDURE
  7834.  
  7835.                               TAKE YOUR TIME. DO NOT RUSH THROUGH THE SET
  7836.                               UP.
  7837.  
  7838.                               The following procedure for Set Up System will
  7839.                               be done once.
  7840.  
  7841.                               Refer to the monitor screen between each step
  7842.                               to see how the instruction in the manual
  7843.                               compares with the display on the screen.
  7844.  
  7845.                               Check off each step as you complete it.
  7846.  
  7847.             Set Up Disks
  7848.  
  7849.                               1.    Read the instructions supplied with the
  7850.                                     computer system on its proper hookup and
  7851.                                     operation. Follow them carefully.
  7852.  
  7853.                               2.    Take 7 new blank disks and label as
  7854.                                     follows: (Use felt tip marker.)
  7855.  
  7856.                                     1.  DOS Copy
  7857.                                     2.  Program Disk
  7858.                                     3.  Program Disk BACKUP
  7859.                                     4.  Posting Information Disk
  7860.                                     5.  Posting Information Disk BACKUP #1
  7861.                                     6.  Posting Information Disk BACKUP #2
  7862.                                     7.  Posting Information Disk / ARCHIVE
  7863.                                         COPY
  7864.  
  7865.                               3.    (Do not turn computer system power on.)
  7866.  
  7867.                                     Put DOS Disk (PC DOS or MS DOS) in drive
  7868.                                     A (Label side up). Close the door or
  7869.                                     latch (if 5 1/4" disk).
  7870.  
  7871.                               4.    Put blank disk you just labeled DOS Copy
  7872.                                     in drive B.
  7873.  
  7874.                                     Always close the door or latch to the
  7875.                                     disk drive after a disk has been
  7876.                                     inserted if you are using 5 1/4" disks.
  7877.  
  7878.                               5.    Turn computer system power on. (Printer,
  7879.                                     monitor, then computer.)
  7880.  
  7881.                                     If your computer system sets the date
  7882.                                     and time automatically, skip steps 6 and
  7883.                                     7.
  7884.  
  7885.                                                                         12-3
  7886.  
  7887.                                                                   Appendix C
  7888.                                            Dual Floppy Disk Set Up Procedure
  7889.  
  7890.  
  7891.                               6.    When disk drives stop, type in the date
  7892.                                     (m/d/y). <Enter>
  7893.  
  7894.                               7.    For the time, press <Enter>.
  7895.  
  7896.                               8.    On the screen, you see: A>_
  7897.  
  7898.                                     Type: diskcopy a: b: <Enter>
  7899.  
  7900.                               9.    Disks are in correct drives. <Enter>
  7901.  
  7902.                               10.   Always wait for disk drives to stop
  7903.                                     before going on to the next step.
  7904.  
  7905.                                     Copy another? Type: n
  7906.  
  7907.                               11.   Remove DOS (original) from drive A. Put
  7908.                                     it in a safe place.
  7909.  
  7910.                               12.   Remove DOS Copy from drive B, and place
  7911.                                     it in drive A.
  7912.  
  7913.                               13.   Put the new blank disk you labeled
  7914.                                     POSTING INFORMATION DISK in drive B.
  7915.  
  7916.                               14.   Type: format b: <Enter>
  7917.  
  7918.                               15.   Be sure the disks are in the correct
  7919.                                     drives. <Enter>
  7920.  
  7921.                               16.   Always wait for disk drives to stop.
  7922.  
  7923.                                     Remove the POSTING INFORMATION DISK from
  7924.                                     drive B.
  7925.  
  7926.                                     Format another? Type: n
  7927.  
  7928.                               17.   Put the new blank disk you marked
  7929.                                     PROGRAM DISK in drive B.
  7930.  
  7931.                               18.   Type: format b:/s <Enter>
  7932.  
  7933.                               19.   Be sure the disks are in the correct
  7934.                                     drives. <Enter>
  7935.  
  7936.                               20.   Always wait for disk drives to stop.
  7937.  
  7938.                                     Format another? Type: n
  7939.  
  7940.                               21.   At the A>, type: copy a:diskcopy.com b:
  7941.                                     <Enter>
  7942.  
  7943.                                                                         12-4
  7944.  
  7945.                                                                   Appendix C
  7946.                                            Dual Floppy Disk Set Up Procedure
  7947.  
  7948.  
  7949.                               22.   When disk drives stop, remove DOS Copy
  7950.                                     from drive A.
  7951.  
  7952.                               23.   Put the original VIANSOFT(R) Church
  7953.                                     Treasurer TUTORIAL-TRIAL DISK in drive
  7954.                                     A.
  7955.  
  7956.                               24.   At the A>, type: a:install <Enter>
  7957.  
  7958.                               25.   At the First-time User Instruction
  7959.                                     Screen, press <Enter>.
  7960.  
  7961.                               26.   After the installation is completed,
  7962.                                     remove both disks.
  7963.  
  7964.                                     Continue with the Set Up VIANSOFT(R)
  7965.                                     Church Treasurer in the Getting Started
  7966.                                     section of this manual.
  7967.  
  7968.  
  7969.  
  7970.  
  7971.  
  7972.  
  7973.  
  7974.  
  7975.  
  7976.  
  7977.  
  7978.  
  7979.  
  7980.  
  7981.  
  7982.  
  7983.  
  7984.  
  7985.  
  7986.  
  7987.  
  7988.  
  7989.  
  7990.  
  7991.  
  7992.  
  7993.  
  7994.  
  7995.  
  7996.  
  7997.  
  7998.  
  7999.  
  8000.  
  8001.                                                                         12-5
  8002.  
  8003.                                                                   Appendix D
  8004.                                          Single Floppy Disk Set Up Procedure
  8005.  
  8006.  
  8007.          SINGLE FLOPPY DISK SET UP PROCEDURE
  8008.  
  8009.                               TAKE YOUR TIME. DO NOT RUSH THROUGH THE SET
  8010.                               UP.
  8011.  
  8012.                               The following procedure for Set Up System will
  8013.                               be done once.
  8014.  
  8015.                               Refer to the monitor screen between each step
  8016.                               to see how the instruction in the manual
  8017.                               compares with the display on the screen.
  8018.  
  8019.                               Check off each step as you complete it.
  8020.  
  8021.             Set Up Disks
  8022.  
  8023.                               1.    Read the instructions supplied with the
  8024.                                     computer system on its proper hookup and
  8025.                                     operation. Follow them carefully.
  8026.  
  8027.                               2.    Take 5 new blank disks and label as
  8028.                                     follows: (Use felt tip marker.)
  8029.  
  8030.                                     1.  DOS Copy
  8031.                                     2.  Program Disk (with Posting
  8032.                                         Information)
  8033.                                     3.  Program Disk (w/Posting Info) BACKUP
  8034.                                         #1
  8035.                                     4.  Program Disk (w/Posting Info) BACKUP
  8036.                                         #2
  8037.                                     5.  Program Disk (w/Posting Info)
  8038.                                         ARCHIVE COPY
  8039.  
  8040.                                     Note: All references to Program Disk or
  8041.                                           Posting Information Disk will
  8042.                                           refer to your Program Disk (with
  8043.                                           Posting Information).
  8044.  
  8045.                               3.    (Do not turn computer system power on.)
  8046.  
  8047.                                     Put DOS Disk (PC DOS or MS DOS) in drive
  8048.                                     A (Label side up). Close the door or
  8049.                                     latch, if applicable.
  8050.  
  8051.                                     Always close the door or latch to the
  8052.                                     disk drive after a disk has been
  8053.                                     inserted.
  8054.  
  8055.                               4.    Turn computer system power on. (Printer,
  8056.                                     monitor, then computer.)
  8057.  
  8058.  
  8059.                                                                         12-6
  8060.  
  8061.                                                                   Appendix D
  8062.                                          Single Floppy Disk Set Up Procedure
  8063.  
  8064.  
  8065.                                     If your computer system sets the date
  8066.                                     and time automatically, skip the next
  8067.                                     two steps.
  8068.  
  8069.                               5.    When disk drives stop, type in the date
  8070.                                     (m/d/y). <Enter>
  8071.  
  8072.                               6.    For the time, just press <Enter>.
  8073.  
  8074.                               7.    You will now make a copy of the DOS
  8075.                                     Disk.
  8076.  
  8077.                                     On the screen, you see: A>_
  8078.  
  8079.                                     Refer to Appendix F for Diskcopy
  8080.                                     instructions.
  8081.  
  8082.                                     When making the copy of DOS:
  8083.  
  8084.                                     Your source disk is the original DOS
  8085.                                     disk.
  8086.  
  8087.                                     Your target disk is the disk you labeled
  8088.                                     DOS COPY.
  8089.  
  8090.                               8.    Format the Program Disk (w/Posting
  8091.                                     Information) using the /s option:
  8092.  
  8093.                                     Put the DOS copy in drive A.
  8094.  
  8095.                                     Type: format b:/s <Enter>
  8096.  
  8097.                                     The computer will prompt you to put your
  8098.                                     Program Disk (Disk B) at the appropriate
  8099.                                     time.
  8100.  
  8101.                               9.    After the format is completed, place the
  8102.                                     Tutorial-Trial Disk in drive A.
  8103.  
  8104.                                     Type: a:install <Enter>
  8105.  
  8106.                               10.   Select Single Disk System on the
  8107.                                     Installation Menu.
  8108.  
  8109.                                     Follow the instructions on the screen.
  8110.  
  8111.                                     Continue with the Set Up VIANSOFT(R)
  8112.                                     Church Treasurer in the Getting Started
  8113.                                     section of this manual.
  8114.  
  8115.  
  8116.  
  8117.                                                                         12-7
  8118.  
  8119.                                                                   Appendix E
  8120.                                                       Transaction Type Codes
  8121.  
  8122.  
  8123.          TRANSACTION TYPE CODES
  8124.  
  8125.                               Transaction Type Codes (T, TRAN TYPE, TR TP)
  8126.  
  8127.                                   I    Income
  8128.  
  8129.                                   IA   Income Adjustment
  8130.  
  8131.                                   E    Expense
  8132.  
  8133.                                   EA   Expense Adjustment
  8134.  
  8135.                                   TI   Transfer In
  8136.  
  8137.                                   TO   Transfer Out
  8138.  
  8139.                                   S+   Special Transaction (Add)
  8140.  
  8141.                                   S-   Special Transaction (Subtract)
  8142.  
  8143.                                   BF   Balance Forward
  8144.  
  8145.  
  8146.  
  8147.  
  8148.  
  8149.  
  8150.  
  8151.  
  8152.  
  8153.  
  8154.  
  8155.  
  8156.  
  8157.  
  8158.  
  8159.  
  8160.  
  8161.  
  8162.  
  8163.  
  8164.  
  8165.  
  8166.  
  8167.  
  8168.  
  8169.  
  8170.  
  8171.  
  8172.  
  8173.  
  8174.  
  8175.                                                                         12-8
  8176.  
  8177.                                                                   Appendix F
  8178.                                                                     Diskcopy
  8179.  
  8180.  
  8181.          DISKCOPY
  8182.  
  8183.                               1.    Put MS DOS Disk or PC DOS Disk in drive
  8184.                                     A.
  8185.  
  8186.                                     (Label side up; close the latch on the
  8187.                                     disk drive if applicable)
  8188.  
  8189.                               2.    Turn system power on.
  8190.  
  8191.                                     (Always wait for disk drives to stop
  8192.                                     before going on to the next step.)
  8193.  
  8194.                                     Skip Steps 3 and 4 if your computer
  8195.                                     performs them automatically.
  8196.  
  8197.                               3.    Type today's date (MM/DD/YY). <Enter>
  8198.  
  8199.                               4.    Type time or just press <Enter>.
  8200.  
  8201.                               5.    When you see the A> on the screen,
  8202.  
  8203.                                     Type: diskcopy a: a: <Enter>
  8204.  
  8205.                               6.    A message on the monitor reads:
  8206.  
  8207.                                     Insert source diskette in drive A:
  8208.  
  8209.                                     Strike any key when ready
  8210.  
  8211.                                     Note: The messages may vary depending on
  8212.                                           the version of DOS you are using,
  8213.                                           but the intent is the same.
  8214.  
  8215.                                     Follow the instructions on the screen.
  8216.  
  8217.                                     Remove the DOS disk from drive A (put it
  8218.                                     back in its protective jacket, if
  8219.                                     applicable).
  8220.  
  8221.                               7.    Place SOURCE disk in drive A. <Enter>
  8222.  
  8223.                               8.    A message on the monitor states that the
  8224.                                     computer is copying the information from
  8225.                                     the disk.
  8226.  
  8227.                                     When the disk drive stops, a message on
  8228.                                     the monitor reads:
  8229.  
  8230.                                     Insert target diskette in drive A:
  8231.  
  8232.  
  8233.                                                                         12-9
  8234.  
  8235.                                                                   Appendix F
  8236.                                                                     Diskcopy
  8237.  
  8238.  
  8239.                                     Strike any key when ready
  8240.  
  8241.                                     Remove the SOURCE disk from drive A (put
  8242.                                     it back in its protective jacket).
  8243.  
  8244.                               9.    Take your TARGET disk and place it in
  8245.                                     drive A. <Enter>
  8246.  
  8247.                                     Depending on your computer, you may be
  8248.                                     asked to put your SOURCE disk in drive A
  8249.                                     again. (Follow the instructions on the
  8250.                                     screen.)
  8251.  
  8252.                                     Note: When using a new blank disk, a
  8253.                                           message may be displayed:
  8254.                                           Formatting while copying.
  8255.  
  8256.                               10.   After the disk drive stops, a message on
  8257.                                     the monitor is displayed:
  8258.  
  8259.                                     Copy complete
  8260.  
  8261.                                     Copy another (Y/N)?
  8262.  
  8263.                                     Type: y (for Yes) or n (for No).
  8264.  
  8265.  
  8266.  
  8267.  
  8268.  
  8269.  
  8270.  
  8271.  
  8272.  
  8273.  
  8274.  
  8275.  
  8276.  
  8277.  
  8278.  
  8279.  
  8280.  
  8281.  
  8282.  
  8283.  
  8284.  
  8285.  
  8286.  
  8287.  
  8288.  
  8289.  
  8290.  
  8291.                                                                        12-10
  8292.  
  8293.                                                                   Appendix G
  8294.                            Alternate Method of Recording and Posting Payroll
  8295.  
  8296.  
  8297.          ALTERNATE METHOD OF RECORDING AND POSTING PAYROLL
  8298.  
  8299.                               This method of recording and posting payroll
  8300.                               allows the total salary (Gross Pay) to be
  8301.                               shown as an expense at the time the net pay
  8302.                               check is issued even though the check issued
  8303.                               reflects only a portion of the total salary.
  8304.  
  8305.             Set Up Report     Set up a Report Group under the General
  8306.             Group and Budget  Operating Fund for each employee.
  8307.             Items for Payroll
  8308.  
  8309.                               Example:
  8310.  
  8311.                                     General Operating Fund
  8312.                                     Pastor Salary (Report Group)
  8313.                                     Secretary Salary (Report Group)
  8314.                                     Sexton (Report Group)
  8315.  
  8316.                               Under each Report Group, set up Budget Items
  8317.                               for Gross Pay and for each deduction to be
  8318.                               made from Gross Pay.
  8319.  
  8320.                               Example:
  8321.  
  8322.                                     General Operating Fund
  8323.                                     Pastor Salary (Report Group)
  8324.                                     Gross Pay (Budget Item)
  8325.                                     Federal Withholding (Budget Item)
  8326.  
  8327.             Posting and       Example:
  8328.             Recording
  8329.             Procedure for
  8330.             Payroll
  8331.  
  8332.                               Pastor's Salary (Gross Pay):  $1,000.00
  8333.                               (Federal Withholding):          $300.00
  8334.  
  8335.                               Using the previous example of the pastor's
  8336.                               salary, at the time the payroll check is
  8337.                               issued to the pastor, when the expense is
  8338.                               entered into the Church Treasurer, enter the
  8339.                               amount of the check ($700.00) for the total
  8340.                               amount of the entry.
  8341.  
  8342.                               When you indicate Budget Items/Categories to
  8343.                               subtract from, enter the Gross Pay ($1,000.00)
  8344.                               and enter the Federal Withholding as -300.00.
  8345.  
  8346.                               All deductions to Gross Pay are entered as a
  8347.                               minus number.
  8348.  
  8349.                                                                        12-11
  8350.  
  8351.                                                                   Appendix G
  8352.                            Alternate Method of Recording and Posting Payroll
  8353.  
  8354.  
  8355.             How The Payroll   The Transactions By Entry Date (Journal) will
  8356.             Entries Are       display the following based on the previous
  8357.             Displayed On      example:
  8358.             Reports
  8359.  
  8360.                               Pastor's Salary: Gross Pay    ($1000.00)
  8361.                               Pastor's Salary: Federal W/H    $300.00
  8362.                               Entry Total                    ($700.00)
  8363.  
  8364.                               The $300.00 represents the amount included in
  8365.                               Gross Pay that has been deducted from the
  8366.                               Pastor's salary. The $300.00 is being held
  8367.                               (for the Pastor) to be forwarded to the
  8368.                               government agency for Federal Withholding at a
  8369.                               later date.
  8370.  
  8371.                               Note: The amount of the Federal Withholding is
  8372.                                     deducted from the Budget Item Pastor's
  8373.                                     Salary:Gross Pay when the payroll check
  8374.                                     amount is entered in the Church
  8375.                                     Treasurer.
  8376.  
  8377.             Enter Expense For After you write the check for the Pastor's
  8378.             Deductions        Federal Withholding amount, enter the expense
  8379.                               in the Church Treasurer for the full amount of
  8380.                               the Federal Withholding ($300.00) following
  8381.                               the procedure you would to enter normal
  8382.                               expenses.
  8383.  
  8384.             How The Payroll   Once the Federal Withholding check amount is
  8385.             Entries Are       entered in the Church Treasurer, the Budget
  8386.             Displayed On      Item/Category GROSS PAY is shown with an
  8387.             Reports           expense total of $1,000.00. The Budget
  8388.                               Item/Category FEDERAL WITHHOLDING is shown
  8389.                               with an expense total of zero.
  8390.  
  8391.  
  8392.  
  8393.  
  8394.  
  8395.  
  8396.  
  8397.  
  8398.  
  8399.  
  8400.  
  8401.  
  8402.  
  8403.  
  8404.  
  8405.  
  8406.  
  8407.                                                                        12-12
  8408.  
  8409.  
  8410.  
  8411.          INDEX
  8412.  
  8413.  
  8414.           Activities, recording and         Church Info
  8415.           posting to a fund  2-7              display/edit  6-14
  8416.           Adjustment                          enter  1-11
  8417.             expense  4-14                   Church organizations, recording
  8418.             income  4-7                     and posting  2-7
  8419.           Adjustments by posting date       Close down system  2-9
  8420.           report  5-11                      Closing year routine  2-3
  8421.           All bank accounts summary         Code
  8422.           report  5-17                        assign number  1-7
  8423.           Assigning number codes  1-7         default bank account  6-16
  8424.           Backup  2-9                         default bank and fund  1-13
  8425.           Balance forward                     default fund  6-17
  8426.             enter  4-23                     Code list
  8427.           Bank Account                        bank account  5-18
  8428.             add  6-12                         item  5-17
  8429.             change  3-1                     Codes
  8430.             default code  6-16                transaction type  12-8
  8431.             definition  1-1                 Computer
  8432.             delete  6-14                      not working  2-22
  8433.             display/edit  6-11              Computer, set up
  8434.             edit  6-12                      VIANSOFT(R)  1-9
  8435.             find  6-12                      Data Disk, change  11-1
  8436.             information  1-13               Data Not Correct  2-20
  8437.             set up  1-4                       repair menu, Utilities  8-5
  8438.             set up suggestions  1-3         Date, report  5-1
  8439.           Bank account code list  5-18      Default
  8440.           Bank code default, set  1-13        bank account code  6-16
  8441.           Bank statement                      bank and fund code  1-13
  8442.             reconciliatiion  7-1              fund code  6-17
  8443.           Budget Item                       Disk
  8444.             add  6-3                          hard disk set up  1-9
  8445.             delete  6-4                       new floppy data disk  8-1
  8446.             edit  6-4                         status  8-6
  8447.             find  6-2                       Disk space available  8-6
  8448.             information, enter  1-12        Diskcopy  12-9
  8449.             set up suggestions  1-3         Display/Edit
  8450.           Budget item, display/edit  6-1      bank account  6-11
  8451.           Budget Item/Category                Budget Item  6-1
  8452.             definition  1-1                   church information  6-14
  8453.             maximum entered per               default bank account
  8454.             screen  4-5                       code  6-16
  8455.           Budget items/Categories             fund  6-8
  8456.             set up  1-6                       fund code  6-17
  8457.           Budget vs expenses report  5-13     overview  6-1
  8458.           Change bank account  3-1            report grouping  6-5
  8459.           Change hard disk                  Dual Floppy
  8460.           subdirectory  9-1                   set up  1-10, 12-3
  8461.           Change Posting Information          start up  2-8
  8462.           Disk  11-1                        Edit commands  12-1
  8463.  
  8464.  
  8465.                                                                          I-1
  8466.  
  8467.                                                                        Index
  8468.  
  8469.  
  8470.  
  8471.          Edit commands, basic  2-16        Income
  8472.          End of the year  8-4                adjustment  4-7
  8473.          End of year routine  2-3            by posting date report  5-9
  8474.          Enter                               definition  1-2
  8475.            bank account                      enter  4-1
  8476.            information  1-13                 enter in default and other
  8477.            budget item information  1-12     areas  4-4
  8478.            church information  1-11          enter in default fund  4-4
  8479.            report grouping                   enter to date  1-14
  8480.            information  1-12                 enter to other than default
  8481.          Enter Transactions Menu  4-1        fund  4-6
  8482.          Entry date                        Income vs expenses report  5-14
  8483.            last  8-6                       Install Toggles
  8484.          Error messages  2-22                Clear designated income
  8485.          Expense                             on/off  8-7
  8486.            adjustment  4-14                  Report filter on/off  8-7
  8487.            definition  1-3                 Interest
  8488.            enter  4-11                       enter
  8489.            enter to date  1-14             Item code list  5-17
  8490.          Expenses                          Journal (by entry date)  4-26
  8491.            by item report  5-8             Key disk, using  2-17
  8492.            by posting date report  5-7     List
  8493.          Files for word processing  8-8      bank account code  5-18
  8494.          Filter                              item code  5-17
  8495.            predefined report  5-1          Location of funds report  5-15
  8496.            report  5-2                     Main Menu, selecting
  8497.            save report  5-3                options  2-1
  8498.          Floppy disk, backup  2-12         Menu
  8499.          Fund                                repair  8-5
  8500.            add  6-9                          translate  8-8
  8501.            code default  1-13                utilities  8-1
  8502.            default code  6-17              Messages, error  2-22
  8503.            definition  1-1                 Monthly bank statement  7-1
  8504.            delete  6-11                    New disk (floppy data disk
  8505.            display/edit  6-8               only)  8-1
  8506.            edit  6-9                       Non-monetary assets  2-19
  8507.            enter information  1-11         Not working, computer  2-22
  8508.            find  6-9                       Number codes, assign  1-7
  8509.            maximum entered per             Payroll, posting and
  8510.            screen  4-5                     recording  12-11
  8511.            recording and posting church    Posting
  8512.            activities  2-7                   disk Name (floppy only),
  8513.            set up  1-5                       Set  10-1
  8514.            set up suggestions  1-3           for church organizations  2-7
  8515.          Hard disk                           routine, normal  2-2
  8516.            backup  2-10                    Posting date
  8517.            restore backup  2-11              last  8-6
  8518.            set up  1-9                     Posting Information Disk,
  8519.            start up  2-8                   change  11-1
  8520.            subdirectory change  9-1        Program, update  12-2
  8521.          How To Begin  1-1                 Prove bank statement  7-1
  8522.  
  8523.                                                                          I-2
  8524.  
  8525.                                                                        Index
  8526.  
  8527.  
  8528.  
  8529.           Recalculate amounts  8-5            see Report  4-26
  8530.           Reconcile bank statement  7-1     Restore backup to hard
  8531.           Record and post to date  1-14     disk  2-11
  8532.           Recording                         Selecting options, main
  8533.             church activities  2-7          menu  2-1
  8534.             for church organizations  2-7   Set
  8535.             routine, normal  2-2              Posting Disk Name (floppy
  8536.           Repair file index  8-5              only)  10-1
  8537.           Repair menu  8-5                  Set up
  8538.           Report                              bank accounts  1-4
  8539.             adjustments by posting            budget items/categories  1-6
  8540.             date  5-11                        computer files  1-9
  8541.             all bank accounts                 dual floppy  1-10, 12-3
  8542.             summary  5-17                     funds  1-5
  8543.             budget vs expenses  5-13          hard disk  1-9
  8544.             expenses by item  5-8             report groupings  1-6
  8545.             expenses by posting date  5-7     single floppy  1-10
  8546.             filter  5-2                       suggestions  1-3
  8547.             income by posting date  5-9     Set up, single floppy  12-6
  8548.             income vs expenses  5-14        Shutdown, improper  2-20
  8549.             location of funds  5-15         Single bank account status
  8550.             multiple bank accounts  5-3     report  5-16
  8551.             output to  5-2                  Single drive, start up  2-8
  8552.             Posting dates  5-1              Single Floppy, set up  1-10,
  8553.             predefined filter  5-1          12-6
  8554.             Running  5-1                    Special transactions
  8555.             save filter  5-3                  enter  4-21
  8556.             single bank account             Specials by posting date
  8557.             status  5-16                    report  5-12
  8558.             specials by posting             Start up VIANSOFT(R)  2-8
  8559.             date  5-12                      Status
  8560.             Transaction by item  5-4          disk  8-6
  8561.             transactions by entry date      Subdirectory
  8562.             (journal)  5-6                    change hard disk  9-1
  8563.             transactions by entry           Transaction
  8564.             type  5-5                         type codes  12-8
  8565.             transfers by posting            Transaction by item report  5-4
  8566.             date  5-10                      Transactions
  8567.           Report filter  5-2                  balance forward  4-23
  8568.           Report Grouping                     by bank account  8-6
  8569.             add  6-6                          by entry date report
  8570.             definition  1-1                   (journal)  5-6
  8571.             delete  6-8                       by entry type report  5-5
  8572.             display/edit  6-5                 enter expense
  8573.             edit  6-6                         adjustment  4-14
  8574.             enter information  1-12           enter expenses  4-11
  8575.             find  6-5                         enter income  4-1
  8576.             set up  1-6                       enter income to default
  8577.             set up suggestions  1-3           fund  4-4
  8578.           Reports                             enter income to default fund
  8579.             menu  5-1                         and other areas  4-4
  8580.  
  8581.                                                                          I-3
  8582.  
  8583.                                                                        Index
  8584.  
  8585.  
  8586.  
  8587.            enter interest  4-1
  8588.            enter menu  4-1
  8589.            enter special  4-21
  8590.            enter transfer  4-17
  8591.            income adjustment  4-7
  8592.            income to other than default
  8593.            fund  4-6
  8594.          Transactions by entry date,
  8595.          report  4-26
  8596.          Transfer
  8597.            bank account to bank
  8598.            account  4-17
  8599.          Transfers by posting date
  8600.          report  5-10
  8601.          Translate menu  8-8
  8602.          Troubleshooting  2-20
  8603.          Update program  12-2
  8604.          Utilities Menu  8-1
  8605.          Wordprocessing files  8-8
  8606.          Year End  8-4
  8607.          Year end routine  2-3
  8608.  
  8609.  
  8610.  
  8611.  
  8612.  
  8613.  
  8614.          NOTE: The printed copy of the
  8615.          VianSoft(R) Church Treasurer
  8616.          Entry Sheet will be found on
  8617.          the last page of the perfect
  8618.          bound copy of the manual you
  8619.          receive after registration.
  8620.  
  8621.  
  8622.  
  8623.  
  8624.  
  8625.  
  8626.  
  8627.  
  8628.  
  8629.  
  8630.  
  8631.  
  8632.  
  8633.  
  8634.  
  8635.  
  8636.  
  8637.  
  8638.  
  8639.                                                                          I-4